Home

Phoenix Interface Module 2x RJ-45 Ethernet

Contents

1. LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE PHGNIX AGI 400 FD in m im 73 in 7 in wp in 73 1NB wp 19 19 CONTACT um 28M m 28M 3 20 3 20 m 288 m 2288 m 20 m 2m m 1 A M P ione xi x2 x3 x4 x1 x2 x3 x4 FL SWITCH MM HS Ord No 28 32 32 6 ER o 96 2o 96 96 96 fo 96 969 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 26 S 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 OR t 9 95 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 9 Hz 96 96 96 96 oe 96 96 96 96 96 W I 96 W I 96 96 96 96 e 96 96 W I 96 96 96 96 96 W I 96 W I 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 e E us1 96 So 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 S 96 96 MAC 0 0 o o o 6 ee o e oi 0 o o o o Address 00A0451BDD Paus o9 Ek 92 Ek E 9 Ek 9 3H Ek 92 9 92 d Ek 93 S ee o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o TEE ER 52 3 22 22 TER TEE 22 82 TEE o o o go o9 o o go ef go o o2 o o o o US1 GND US2 GND R1 R2 V 24 099 o Re o 9o o 96 o 9o o Po o Ho o 95 M ti Figure 2 4 Assembly removal of extension modules 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Removal Switch off the supply voltage before removing the extension modules 1 Remove all plug in connections or interface modules 2 Torelease the plug in connection for the system
2. mmm SE DP Switch 5 pri wi H um Priority Default UID LL _ Switch 9 TU Neue Priority Default HIE SK DESS 58 88 58 88 e E e gt he E Switch 8 V Di alei Priority Default ESCHER de al Switch 7 Priority 40000 687409059 Figure 5 13 Example topology The loops in the example topology illustrated are disabled by active RSTP components The example topology contains three rings the root and the backup root are components in each of the three rings The three rings do not affect one another a modification to the topology in one ring does not affect the topology of the other two rings Rule 3 No more than ten active Spanning Tree components in the topology when using Spanning Tree default settings The ability to disintegrate any topology to form a tree without loops requires a complex protocol that works with several variable timers These variable timers are 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree dimensioned using IEEE standard default values so that a topology with a maximum of ten active Spanning Tree components always results in a stable network When using large tree please note the following see also Large Tree Support on page 5 5 Inthe large tree support RSTP topology do not use devices that do not s
3. 68740001 Figure 1 11 Example for status indicators PHOENIX CONTACT 1 13 FL SWITCH MM HS 1 2 2 Meaning of the 7 Segment Display If the MMS has established a PROFINET connection a dot appears in the bottom right corner of the display During Error Free Operation Display Meaning o Extracting starting firmware boot Sending BootP requests Saving parameterization data to the plug in memory and the head station Downloading firmware via TFTP Loading firmware in the Flash memory that was loaded via the network The recently loaded firmware was successfully saved in the Flash memory NENNEN Initializing firmware rb Firmware running A reset has been triggered via SNMP WBM or V 24 RS 232 the device is preparing to restart reboot After a device configuration update rC reconfiguration may appear in the display after a restart This means that the firmware automatically adapts the new configuration and then restarts the switch again A port blocked by the port security function is indicated with Pb The device is operated as a PROFINET IO device and is waiting for startup using a PROFINET controller The device cannot be accessed via an IP address 00 alternates In PROFINET mode the engineering tool called the flashing function with another display SP Spanning Tree initialization active Messages Duri
4. LA CL Oo e el PE w e el KELN e e ei 12945678 Ee is ECO E Kai pou od oy Er Xx xg pesi TUE I i I 1 I 1 i 1 f 1 a i nud bs ru uw Wes um maan 7 oons F3 5 mmm cu D sense uon A 3 S 6j EZE G 3 ej Lee r Ze 7 V Be 3228 c r3 s IDDIE nm WS RZA CSS eg ee es Fiano i vmuaanng 77 D UURUIU HERES r3 fe el Bie 1 TITTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTIT Es d Z a we o E LE qs Baer esse ese G ECO e ECH DOO0000 91010 e abb omit HN 705600105 Figure 5 14 Redundant coupling of network segments 5 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09
5. 5 16 Example ped ge 28 38 ES cz 3r 1 e be E Jelli page al Switch 3 Switch 1 ERC ues Ain ce m Switch 12 Dems Te ze zs oct EE 1 m vraacere DUUUDIIOONITICONDI Priority 0 DI Priority Default m Switch 11 NAN Priority 40000 DU a zz VA SAN Ze s Ses be E DE TO SS Ss es cc Switch 6 GENIE ERC E MT Priority Default LI E 1 Backup root bridge BH ei s E as Priority 4000 E Laf Switch 4 JEN E Priority 40000 PE Swich T witc PHOENIX CONTACT Priority Default
6. B n bh 4n mE l cd E s l og A A 5 bh ri B Port 1 2 Headstation system Up Time 4 day s 1 h 17 min 12 sec End af last measurement 4 day s 1 h 17 min 8 sec Measurement Interval 3l sec Notice This web page wil be refreshed in 70 sec automatically Refresh Figure 4 44 Utilization web page 35 Please note that the scale is spread according to the capacity utilization Diagnostics Event Table Menu Here you will find a list of the latest important events The list contains up to 200 entries from the 200th entry and onwards the oldest entries are overwritten FIFO principle first in first out If old entries are overwritten by new entries a corresponding note is displayed under the event table Event Table system Us Time Odays 22 hours 4 minutes 32 seconds ae Time Evnt Fiz SIE pain eec e Ne El modified the first 15 h 44 min 22 sec Link up at part 4 15 h 44 min 20 sec Link down at port 4 15 h 43 min 33 sec Link up at part 4 20 min SU sec Link down at port 4 veer GYRPenabled 2 b sec STF topologie changed 5 sec Disabling port 5 Enter password Clear Figure 4 45 Event Table web page 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 37 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 38 PHOENIX CONTACT The Clear button can be used to delete entries in the event table The following events are listed in t
7. Activating deactivating port security access control for web Switching the VLAN mode Switching the operating mode Activating deactivating the RSTP redundancy mechanism Reset All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently PHOENIX CONTACT 4 123 FL SWITCH MM HS Structure of the Telnet Interface Screens Login Screen Login Screen gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com Running switch application version XXX Password 68740010 Figure 4 60 User interface login screen The login screen indicates the version of the firmware used A password must be entered to make other settings By default upon delivery the password is private It is case sensitive We strongly recommend that you change the password Basic Switch Configuration E Telnet 192 168 0 45 x Basic Switch Configuration hh hitititite MAC Address HB hB 45 HB 7B 1F n A AA IP Address 172 168 H 45 n n Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 d d A Default Gateway H H H H A TEES IP Parameter Assignment lt BootP gt n AAAAA AAAAAAAAA Redundanc y Hapid Spanning Tree Enabled gt Current Ulan Status WLAN Tagging Ulan Mode lt ULAN Tagging A Port Security amp Enahle gt Access Control for W
8. In addition to the PNIO DATA STATE standard variables the switch provides the link status as a process data byte for each port If the PNIO DATA VALID bit for the PNIO DATA STATE variables declares the switch process data as valid the process data item for a port can have the following values Value 1 active link Value 2 no active link Value 3 link present but partner cannot establish link only for FX ports Far End Fault Detection Process data can only be accessed if the parameterized desired configuration on device startup corresponds to the actual configuration The Status word and the Control word of the management agent are not used 8 2 3 PROFINET Flashing Function If the switch is requested to flash in PROFINET mode by the engineering tool 00 and the previous current indication alternately flash in the display 8 2 4 Naming the Device In order to start up a switch in PROFINET mode each switch must be assigned a name once i e each PROFINET device is assigned a unique device name A device search Read PROFINET function in PC WorX is performed via the engineering tool where all the devices that can be accessed in the network are listed After identifying unknown devices via the specified MAC address or the flashing function the device name configured in the engineering tool is saved permanently on the switch with the Assign Name function The device name can also be ass
9. 6874 en 09 IGMP on Layer 3 Query IGMP snooping 6874 en 09 Multicast Filtering 6 4 Dynamic Multicast Groups 6 4 1 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The Internet Group Management Protocol describes a method for distributing information via multicast applications between routers and termination devices at IP level Layer 3 When starting a multicast application a network device transmits an IGMP membership report and thus informs its members of a specific multicast group A router collects these membership reports and thus maintains the multicast groups of its subnetwork At regular intervals the router sends IGMP queries This causes the devices with multicast receiver applications to send a membership report again The IGMP Query function only transmits in the management VLAN and only stops if there is a better querier in the management VLAN The router enters the IP multicast group address from the report message in its routing table This means that frames with this IP multicast group address in the destination address field are only transferred according to the routing table Devices that are no longer members of a multicast group log out with a leave message IGMP Version 2 or later and no longer send report messages The router also removes the routing table entry if it does not receive a report message within a specific time aging time If several routers with active IGMP query function are connect
10. Figure 2 10 Head station with labeling field 2 4 1 Assembly Push the expansion plug through the mounting holes and into the openings on the top of the MMS A Press down on the expansion plug cap to secure the plug B Ne a a oi omhimimmnimnliin o Figure 2 11 Assembly of the labeling field 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 2 4 2 Removal Pull the expansion plug cap upwards until the entire plug is removed Remove the labeling field 2 4 3 Dimensions of the Labeling Field 29 mm 1 142 in 15 mm 0 591 in 125 mm 4 921 in Figure 2 12 Dimensions of the labeling field 2 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Assembly and Installation 2 5 Installing the Modular Managed Switch System 2 5 1 Connecting the Supply Voltage to the FL SWITCH MM HS Head Station 24 V DC The system is operated using a 24 V DC voltage which is applied at the head station If required the voltage can also be supplied redundantly see Figure 2 14 If redundant power supply monitoring is active default setting an error is indicated if 33 only one voltage is applied A bridge between US1 and US2 dotted line connection prevents this error message It is also possible to deactivate monitoring in web based management or via SNMP X5 US1 GND US2 GND X6 R1 24 V DC 68740005 Figure 2 13 Supplying the system using one voltage source Redundant 24 V DC
11. Figure 3 3 Flowchart Loading the configuration data PHOENIX CONTACT 3 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 1 3 2 Assigning IP Parameters Operating as a PROFINET device with DCP Yes Yes Assignment of static IP parameters via V 24 RS 232 Device is started up IP parameters Three requests by the remain PROFINET IO contoller unanswered DER Assignment of engineering tool IP parameters via BootP received from BootP server Is there a valid local IP address Assignment of IP parameters via DHCP Entry of IP parameters as local configuration Start with local configuration data SE DHCP sewer as long as valid data does not respond is available indefinite waiting time Q 687407009 Startup completed Figure 3 4 Flowchart Assigning IP parameters 35 If DHCP is selected as the assignment mechanism the DHCP server must offer a DHCP lease time of at least five minutes so that the switch accepts the assigned IP parameters 3 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions Es 3 2 Starting Up Interface Modules For GL certified operation only the interface modules listed in the table below are permitted Table 3 1 Interface modules with GL approval FL IF MEM 2TX D 2832483 FL IF 2FX SC D 2832425 FL IF 2FX SM SC D 2832205 FL IF 2TX VS RJ F 2832344 FL IF 2TX VS RJ D 2832357 3 2 1 FL IF 2TX VS RJ Hot plugging When inserting and removin
12. The value Q for the refresh interval disables the automatic refreshing Enter password Figure 5 2 User Interfaces menu 357 The previously created configuration is lost and the web pages for R STP are hidden if Redundancy is set to Disable on the User Interfaces web page following R STP configuration 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Now switch to the R STP General page in the Switch Station menu Here you will find various information about the Spanning Tree configuration R STP General Rapid Spanning Tree Status This bridge is the root bridge system Up Time 1 days 18 hours 36 minutes 9 seconds Last Topology Change days 18 hours 36 minutes 3 seconds aga Topology Changes Designated Root SU00 nor 40 35 00 84 1F Root Part 0 Root Cost 0 Maximum Age of STP J s Information Hello Time 23 Forward Delay 15s Note This web page will be refreshed in 1 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Senices Figure 5 3 R STP General The web page displays the parameters with which the switch is currently operating R STP Configuration It is sufficient to set the Rapid Spanning Tree status to Enable in order to start R STP using default settings Priority values can be specified for the switch The bridge and backup root can be specified via these priority values Only multiples of 4096 are permitted The desired value c
13. When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation function is activated but link monitoring for the POF ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 2 2 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a POF path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its F SMA ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface PHOENIX CONTACT 3 11 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 2 3 Connecting the F SMA Connectors 35 To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors F SMA is a standardized fiber optic connection We recommend the use of e
14. gt bel SI ies ES nud 5 quii el 5 P a e MTT TTT eio Ca e Kl ej Fab 000000 68740051 Figure 5 1 Possible tree structure with Spanning Tree 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 2 R STP Startup Startup consists of two parts that must be executed in the specified order 1 Enable R STP on all switches that are to be operated as active R STP components in the network 2 Connect the switches to form a meshed topology Only create the meshed topology after activating R STP 5 2 1 Enabling R STP on All Switches Involved R STP can be activated via web based management via the SNMP interface via the serial interface or via Telnet While learning the network topology the switch temporarily does not participate in network communication 5 2 1 1 Enabling With Web Based Management Activate web based management for the switches e g using the Factory Manager Switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate the Rapid Spanning Tree function under Redundancy and confirm by entering your password When activating Rapid Spanning Tree under User Interfaces the redundancy mechanism is not activated In the WBM menu the Rapid Spanning Tree page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree User Interfaces Telnet Server Disable 9 Ena
15. if possible Priority Indicates the priority set for this port default 128 Due to backwards compatibility with STP priority values can be set that are not configurable in RSTP Admin Path Cost Indicates the path costs set for this port A path cost equal to 0 activates the cost calculation according to the transmission speed 10 Mbps 100 100 Mbps 19 Path Cost Indicates the path costs used for this port Forward Transitions Indicates how often the port switches from the Discarding state to the Forwarding state Additional parameters provide information about network paths in a stable topology that are used by the BPDU telegrams Designated Root Root bridge for this Spanning Tree Designated Bridge The switch from which the port receives the best BPDUs The value is based on the priority value in hex and the MAC address Designated Port Port via which the BPDUs are sent from the designated bridge The value is based on the port priority 2 digits and the port number Designated Cost It indicates the path costs of this segment to the root switch Protocol Compatibility Protocol Compatibility Port Made Port is in the Rapid Spanning Tree mode Enter password ForceRstp Port Configuration of port 4 General Security STF LAN Figure 5 8 Protocol Compatibility If a port receives STP BPDUs it switches automatically to STP mode Automatic switching to R STP mode does not take place Sw
16. Designated Switch The switch that connects a specific LAN segment with the lowest path costs to the root switch Root Port The other switches set the port with the lowest path costs or with the highest total transmission speed as the root switch in the forwarding state PHOENIX CONTACT 5 19 FL SWITCH MM HS Priority and MAC Address 5 20 PHOENIX CONTACT There is only ever one root port per switch Exception The switch supports several Spanning Tree domains Designated Ports Ports in the forwarding state of the designated switch These are the ports with the best path to the root switch Switch ID The switch with the lowest bridge identifier is the root switch The bridge identifier consists of the MAC address and the priority Since the priority appears before the MAC address the appropriate priority can be clearly assigned by the root switch independent of the MAC address The switch with the highest priority lowest value becomes the root switch For every switch port within the network a unique cost calculation is created These root path costs are the sum of all path costs for one packet on the path between the root switch and corresponding switch port The port of a switch with the lowest root path costs is always the active port If the same root path costs have been calculated for two or more ports the switch priority followed by the port priority determine the priority of the path Port ID The por
17. Device Information Some general information about this Factory Line device Password protected pages to configure this Factory Line device Switch Station Information about the switch specific function Home Homepage of the Factory Line device Click on the Phoenix Contact logo or name to go to our internet web page Your browser must be properly configured and you need internet access for this to function properly Figure 4 13 Information web page for the MMS General Instructions Contains a brief description of WBM and a navigation tree site map which is linked to every page of WBM 6874 en 09 D IA En CH MM HS FL SWI General Instructions I Device Information General Technical Data Hardware Installation Local Diagnostics Serial Port ES General Confiquration Switch Station Ea Home Figure 4 14 Device Information FL SWITCH MM HS Device Information Vendor Address Phone Internet Type Order Ma Serial Number Bootloader version Firmware Version system Bus Version Hardware Wersion MAC Address user defined Name of Device system Description Physical Lacation Contact IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Configuration and Diagnostics last update 12 08 55 Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG D 32823 Blomberg 49 05235 3 00 www phoenixcontact com FL SWITCH MM HS 20 32 326 53225958 1 20 450 HS 04 10 HI OU al A UU alt FL SWITCH MM HS
18. Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration General System Diagnostics Ports Trap T argets State Ok Additional Device is OF Refresh OF Abbrechen libemehmen Figure 4 5 Diagnostics menu Information about the device status and redundancy is displayed here All the messages for this device are displayed under Messages Ports Properties MMS Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration General System Diagnostics Forts Trap T argets Headskatian Connected 100 MBit TX RJ45 Not Connected Ts AJ45 Connected 100 MBit POF 100 Connected 100 MBit POF 100 Not Connected Ts R45 Connected 100 MBit Ts R45 Connected 100 MBit Ts RJ45 OF Cancel Figure 4 6 Ports menu PHOENIX CONTACT 4 5 FL SWITCH MM HS Comprehensive information e g from interface types and states through transmission data to port levels is displayed here All information is automatically created and updated Trap Targets Properties MMS x Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration General System Diagnostics Ports Trap T argets v Enable Traps will be sent to the following TCP IP addresses 1 Trap target 192 168 52 155 IP Address Trap target 192 168 10 1 IP Address Set Default Values Ira Figure 4 7 Trap Targets menu Trap targets are displayed or set here and the send traps function can be activated or deactivated Clicking on Set De
19. Forwarding Or Disabled Blocking Discarding Due to the edge property of ports they switch to Forwarding immediately In the second case the port generates a data path interruption in order to suppress loops accordingly 35 At least one port in the Forwarding state is at a data path between two Spanning Tree switches so that the data path can be integrated into the network 5 2 4 3 Fast Forwarding If the Spanning Tree Protocol is deactivated at a port the corresponding port is in Fast Forwarding mode A fast forwarding port Ignores all BPDUs that are received at this port Does not send any BPDUs 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 13 FL SWITCH MM HS Frame duplication 5 14 Switches to the Forwarding state immediately after establishing the data link Termination devices connected to this port can be accessed immediately Port STP Status in WBM on the STP Port Configuration page must be set to Disabled to activate fast forwarding Due to the fast switch over times of RSTP frames may be duplicated and the order of frames may be changed 5 2 4 4 Enabling via Serial Interface or Telnet Establish a connection to the switch as described in Management via Local V 24 RS 232 Communication Interface on page 4 116 or Management via Telnet on page 4 123 Set Spanning Tree Enabled on the following page in the Redundancy field and select Save E Telnet 192 168 0 45 hannnnnnan
20. In addition firmware Version 1 11 supports the Spanning Tree redundancy mechanism Firmware 2 03 offers the following additional functions Multicast filter mechanisms IGMP snooping and querier function Memory module support Firmware 2 10 offers the following additional functions Auto refresh of various WBM pages POF and FX interface module support Extensive support and improved configuration handling of the memory module Extended multicast filtering multicast transmitters are detected and added to multicast groups Extended IGMP snooping and IGMP query function switch passively reads IGMP membership reports creates corresponding multicast groups and sends IGMP queries to multicast groups Visualization of port capacity Port prioritization Firmware 3 04 offers the following additional functions VLAN support Rapid Spanning Tree support Security options port based security and access control for WBM Optimization of the password concept Event table logging of important events Representation of MAC address table in WBM Firmware 4 03 offers the following additional functions Optimized Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP improved switch over times Fast ring detection Large tree support Support of LLDP topology detection DHCP support DHCP with option 82 relay agent PROFINET device function and DCP Support of Powe
21. In the example two types of termination device are take into consideration PHOENIX CONTACT 7 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 7 8 PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 7 6 bas INR DO000000 UI Gd DEE sw 2 14 15 e DEER ele Switch 2 Port 2 PVID X Prio X Tagged member of VLAN 5 eoo Switch 2 Deng Port 3 PVID X Prio X Tagged member of VLAN 5 Switch Configuration 1 2 3 4 Device A Untagged member of VLAN 5 Switch 1 Port 7 PVID 5 Prio 4 Untagged member of VLAN 5 Switch 1 Port 1 PVID X Prio X Tagged member of VLAN 5 Device B Tagged member of VLAN 5 Example Communication between termination devices via VLAN Set both switches to VLAN Tagging mode save and restart devices Create VLAN 5 on switch 1 and specify port 7 as an untagged member and port 1 as a tagged member For port 7 at switch 1 set the port VLAN ID to 5 and the port priority to any On switch 2 create port 2 and port 3 as tagged members of VLAN 5 Both termination devices now communicate via the network path shown in the example without other switch ports forwarding the broadcast packets for both termination devices for example If additional infras
22. Integer Read Contains the operating state of the firmware Problem 3 No error 2 Other 1 flWorkFWinfoHealthText 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 12 6874 en 09 Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Display string Read Contains additional information error states for the firmware flWorkFWinfoDisplay 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 13 Display string Read Contains the current data from the diagnostic display flWorkFWCtrl 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 fIWorkFWCtrlBasic 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 fIWorkFWCtrlReset 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 1 Integer Read and write With write access a reset can be executed with 2 With read access the value is always 1 When a reset is triggered rb is indicated in the display fI WorkFWCtrlHttp 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 6 Integer Read and write This object can be used to disable the web server for the switch The modification only takes effect after a restart Web server enabled Web server disabled 1 fIWorkFWCtrlTelnet 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 7 Integer Read and write This object can be used to disable the Telnet function for the MMS The modification only takes effect after a restart Telnet activated 2 Telnet deactivated 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 8
23. Manual The components are transferred to the bus configuration from the device catalog using drag amp drop Automatic The devices are entered via the Read PROFINET function which means that they can be accessed in the network via DCP Discovery and Configuration Protocol For this the devices must be supplied with power and the operating mode must be set to PROFINET Interface Modules and Bus Configuration Nointerface modules configured IP address assignment only by the control system All interface modules configured correctly gt IP address assignment by the control system transmission of process data and alarms from configured slots 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 3 FL SWITCH MM HS One or more interface modules configured incorrectly gt Following startup the MMS indicates Cd configuration difference in the display 35 If Cd appears in the display insert the correct interface modules and restart the switch 35 The desired actual configuration is no longer monitored during the system runtime 8 2 2 Configuring the Switch as a PROFINET IO Device Once all switches have been added to the bus configuration the following settings must be made for the individual switches via the Detail View tab device details The PROFINET device name must be checked and modified if necessary The IP address and the subnet mask must be checked and modified if necessary The update time
24. sensitive We strongly recommend that you change the password via SNMP or WBM Basic Switch Configuration 172 15 2 104 HyperTerminal Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Dis als Anrufen bertragung Basic Switch Configuration Ahhh ttt n A AA hi A n A AA H AARAA n AARAM nnnandn n LOGOUT ush SPACE to verbunden 00 01 00 Auto Erkenn 38400 8 N 1 RF GROSS un aufzeichnen MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Parameter Assignment Redundancy Current Ulan Status Ulan Mode Port Security Access Control for Web Switch Operating Mode Web Interface Telnet Interface SNP Interface Reset APPLY SAVE Enable Disable SHME Interface tCeffective after 15 x Hu HR Ab Hp 9A 1F 192 168 60 45 255 255 255 0 H HHH amp BootP gt Hand Spanning Tree Enal ULAN Tagging lt ULAM Tagging Enable gt Enable gt lt Prof inet gt lt Enable gt lt Disahble gt lt Disable gt Ho reset reboot A 4 118 PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 4 52 IP configuration in the user interface As well as displaying the set MAC address this screen can be used to view or modify the IP parameters Assignment In order to set the IP parameters the Static option must be selected for IP Parameter This user interface screen can be used to determine the addressing mechanism or to trigger a device restart All settings are transferre
25. 1 ifStackEntry 1 ifStackHigherLayer 2 ifStackLowerLayer 4 64 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 3 ifStackStatus 3 ifTestTable 1 ifTestEntry 1 ifTestlD 2 ifTestStatus 3 ifTestType 4 ifTestResult 5 ifTestCode 6 ifTestOwner 4 ifRcvAddressTable 1 ifRcvAddressEntry 1 ifRcvAddressAddress 2 ifRcvAddressStatus 3 ifRcvAddressType 5 ifTableLastChange 6 ifStackLastChange 4 3 10 2 ifConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 2 1 ifGroups 1 ifGeneralGroup 2 ifFixedLengthGroup 3 ifHCFixedLength Group 4 ifPacketGroup 5 ifHCPacketGroup 6 ifVHCPacketGroup 7 ifRcvAddressGroup 8 iffestGroup 9 ifStackGroup 10 ifGenerallnformationGroup 11 ifStackGroup2 12 ifOldObjectsGroup 13 ifCounterDiscontinuityGroup 2 ifCompliances 1 ifCompliance 2 ifCompliance2 1 1 1 4 3 10 3 etherMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 32 1 1 etherConformance 1 etherGroups 1 etherStatsGroup 2 etherCollisionTableGroup 3 etherStats100BbsGroup 4 etherStatsBaseGroup 5 etherStatsLowSpeedGroup 6 etherStatsHighSpeedGroup 7 etherDuplexGroup 8 etherControlGroup PHOENIX CONTACT 4 65 FL SWITCH MM HS 9 etherControlPauseGroup 1 etherCompliances 1 etherCompliances 2 ether100MbsCompliance 3
26. 8 ipRouteType 0 1 2 1 1 1 4 48 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 1 ipNetToMedialflndex 2 ipNetToMediaPhysAddress 3 ipNetToMediaNetAddress 4 ipNetToMediaType 23 ipRoutingDiscards 4 3 3 5 ICMP Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 The Internet Control Message Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains information about troubleshooting and control in Internet data traffic 5 icmp 1 icmpInMsgs 2 icmpInErrors 3 iemplnDestUnreachs 4 icmpInTimeExcds 5 iemplnParmProbs 6 icmpInSrcQuenchs 7 icmpInRedirects 8 icmplnEchos 9 icmpInEchoReps 10 icmpInTimestamps 11 icmpInTimestampReps 12 icmpInAddrMasks 13 iemplnAddrMaskReps 14 icmpOutMsgs 15 icmpOutErrors 16 icmpOutDestUnreachs 17 icmpOutTimeExcds 18 icmpOutParmProbs 19 icmpOutSrcQuenchs 20 icmpOutRedirects 21 icmpOutEchos 22 icmpOutEchoReps 23 icmpOutTimestamps 24 icmpOutTimestampReps 25 icmpOutAddrMasks 26 icmpOutAddrMaskReps 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 49 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 3 3 6 Transfer Control Protocol Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 The Transfer Control Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems with implemented TCP Instances of objects which provide information about a specific TCP connection are valid as long as the connection is esta
27. A RA Q A A RA ARAARA ARAARA RAARAARA M a SME GME 2 2 Basic Switch Configuration MAG Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Parameter Assignment Hid zB 45 HB 750 ERR 192 168 8 45 255 255 255 0 6 6 6 8 amp BootP gt Redundancy Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled gt Current Wlan Status ULAH Tagging Ulan Mode lt ULAN Tagging A Port Security amp Enable gt Access Control for Web Enable gt Switch Operating Mode lt Prof inet gt Web Interface Enable gt Telnet Interface amp Disahle SAMP Interface amp Disahle Heset Mo reset gt LOGOUT APPLY SAUE ush SPACE to PHOENIX CONTACT Enable Disable SHME Interface Ceffective after reboot Figure 5 12 Activating Rapid Spanning Tree 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree 5 2 5 Configuration Notes for Rapid Spanning Tree In contrast to the Spanning Tree method the Rapid Spanning Tree method supports event controlled actions that are no longer triggered based on a timer If one cable fails link down the Rapid Spanning Tree method can respond more quickly to this failure and thus the switch over time can be kept low A link down or link up must be detected at the switch so that the RSTP switches can detect a line failure and a restored line more quickly Please take into consideration in particular paths where media converters are used If required media converters offer setting o
28. Description A message is displayed which informs you whether the last change of password was successful Not changed 1 Failed 2 Successful 3 35 Messages 2 and 3 are displayed for approximately ten minutes after the last access after which status 1 not changed is displayed again fI WorkFWCtrlLoginExpire OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 3 Syntax Integer32 30 3600 Access Read and write Description Here the number of seconds between two password entries is specified as a period of time After the time has elapsed the password must be re entered if required Default 300 Range 30 3600 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 93 FL SWITCH MM HS OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 94 PHOENIX CONTACT fI WorkFWCtrlUpdate 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 fI WorkFWCtrlTftplpAddr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 2 IP address Read and write This object can be used to set the IP address of the TFTP server for the firmware update fI WorkFWCtrITftpFile 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 3 Octet string 0 64 Read and write This object can be used to set the name of the firmware file for TFTP download flWorkFWCtrlUpdateStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 4 Integer Read This object can be used to request the status of the firmware update Update successful 1 Update not successful 2 No update compl
29. Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the search method for the switch in the MAC address table Optimized search method for randomly saved MAC addresses default 1 Optimized search method for MAC addresses saved in ascending order 2 flSwitchCtrlDhcpRelayAgentUi 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 10 Integer Read and write This object can be used to hide or show the configuration page for the DHCP relay agent in WBM Hide DHCP relay agent configuration page Show DHCP relay agent configuration page default 2 flSwitchCtriMacTableErase 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 11 Integer Read and write This object can be used to enable the switch to delete all entries from its MAC address table Do not delete MAC address table Delete MAC address table 2 flSwitchPortMirr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 109 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description 4 110 PHOENIX CONTACT flSwitchPortMirrDestinationPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 1 Integer32 Read and write This object can be used to set the port destination port which mirrors the data of another port source port No port mirroring 0 flSwitchPortMirrSourcePort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 2 Integer32 Read and write This object can be used to set the port source port whose data is to
30. Module Interface Port Oper Edge Port Protocol STP State v 1 edge part RSTP forwarding 2 edge port RSTP discarding 3 edge port RSTP discarding us 4 edge port PSIE discarding 5 edge port RSTP discarding 6 edge port RSTP discarding wi fi edge port RalP forwarding d edge part RSTP discarding Note Zus web page wil be refreshed in 22 sec automatically change the Interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 5 5 R STP Port Table Oper Edge Port All ports that do not receive any R STP BPDUs e g termination device ports become edge ports i e ports that go to the Forwarding state immediately after restart Protocol Indicates the redundancy protocol used R STP State Indicates the current R STP state of the relevant port Possible states Forwarding The port is integrated in the active topology and forwards data Discarding This port does not take part in data transmission Learning This port does not take part in data transmission of the active topology however MAC addresses are learned Blocking Discarding The port has a link but has not been set to the Discarding state by RSTP PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 4 a Rapid Spanning Tree R STP Port Configuration Table R STP Port Configuration Table Admin Path Module Interface Port STP Enable Priority Cosi 1 jg j S pe D 3 ne fo SES za j EE j 1 ze
31. OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to save the device configuration Do not save configuration 1 Save configuration 2 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 95 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 96 PHOENIX CONTACT fIWorkFWCtrlDefaultUponDelivery 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 3 Integer Read and write This object can be used to reset the device to the default settings see Default Upon Delivery Default Settings on page 3 1 It also triggers a restart Do not reset to default settings 1 Reset to default settings 2 flWorkFWCtriConfName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 4 Octet string 0 64 Read and write Here a descriptive name for the saved configuration can be specified or read flWorkFWCtriConfSource 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 5 Integer Read Here the storage location of the loaded configuration can be read Configuration loaded from the device 1 Plug in parameterization memory 2 flWorkFWConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 fI WorkFWConfigTftplPAddr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 2 IP address Read and write This object can be used to set the IP address of the TFTP server flWorkFWConfigTftpFile 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 3 Octet string 0 64
32. Read and write This object can be used to set the file name for TFTP transmission 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flWorkFWConfigStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 4 Integer Read This object provides information about the last TFTP transmission called Transmission OK 1 Transmission not OK 2 No transmission 3 Unknown 4 flWorkFWConfigExecute 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 5 Integer Read and write This object can be used to load or save configuration data No transmission 1 Transmission from server to switch 2 Transmission from switch to server 3 If the new configuration is not activated by a reset after a configuration download when the configuration is saved the previously loaded configuration is rejected and instead the active configuration of the MMS is saved flWorkFWRunningConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 6 Integer Read This object can be used to request the status of the configuration data transmission Not started 1 Transmission in progress 2 Transmission successful 3 Connection error 4 5 6 Incorrect file path name Error PHOENIX CONTACT 4 97 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description fI WorkFWCtrlConfigMemoryModule 1 3 6 1 4 1 43
33. Transmission power unknown 1 Reduced transmission power switch position OFF 2 Normal transmission power switch position ON 3 fiWorkNetPortStpMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 18 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 81 FL SWITCH MM HS Syntax Integer Access Read Description Specifies the port mode during redundancy operation Spanning Tree 1 Rapid Spanning Tree 2 flWorkNetPortPoETable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 flWorkNetPortPoEEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 Description Generates a table with a detailed description of the PoE port configuration flWorkNetPortPoEIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Specifies the port number of the selected port flWorkNetPortPoEPowerEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Indicates the status of the port in relation to the PoE function The port can supply power on request 1 The port does not supply power on request 2 The PoE status is unknown and cannot be set 3 fIWorkNetPortPoECurrentLimitation OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object is used to set the PoE current limitation Limitation to Class 1 devices or 90 mA 1 No limitation up to the maximum permissible value 350 mA 2 The PoE status is unknown and cannot be set 3 flWorkNetPortPoEDeviceClass OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2
34. is indicated on the Configuration Management web page 3 2 8 1 Parameterization Memory Default Upon Delivery By default upon delivery the parameterization memory is empty see Default Upon Delivery Default Settings on page 3 1 3 2 8 2 Twisted Pair Interface Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated Link monitoring for the twisted pair ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been parameterized the 33 existing configuration remains active 3 2 8 3 Function of the Memory Module When saving data to the Flash memory of the device the data is also transmitted to a plugged in memory module 35 If the user resets the module to the settings default upon delivery the configuration is also saved on the memory module See Default Upon Delivery Default Settings on page 3 1 Datais stored to the Flash memory of the head station and in the memory module After a system startup On request by the user 3 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions When starting the MMS the data is read from a plugged in memory module display indicates OP and used as the active configuration The data in the Flash memory is overwritten by the data from the memory module 35 Please note that the password stored on the memory module is also transmitted to the MMS Make sure
35. via the dotidTrafficClassTable of the P bridge MIB Processing Rules The switch controller in the MMS forwards received packets to one of the receive queues according to the following decisions BPDU packets Spanning Tree LLDP and IGMP packets are always assigned to the high priority queue Packets with unknown unicast addresses are always assigned to the low priority queue Packets are assigned to the high priority queue if the priority from the VLAN priority tag is mapped to the high level default priority 4 to 7 Theinternal port priority high results in priority level 7 handling i e the basic settings for data packet assignment to the high priority queue are made A All residual data is assigned to the low priority queue 3 3 4 2 Port Prioritization In addition to the processing sequence according to the priority information from the tag the user can set the internal prioritization for every individual switch port at the MMS In this way the processing of Ethernet data for a particular port can be prioritized 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions The port prioritizing method is suitable for termination devices that do not support tagging and thus cannot generate priorities High port prioritization sets the internal priority of the packets received at this port to priority level 7 In the switch these packets will be processed with priority information 7 within the tag preferred handli
36. 000 000 100 Mbps 200 000 20 000 2 000 000 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 21 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 2 5 6 Flowchart for Specifying the Root Path Determine path to root switch Lowest path costs 9 Same path costs Root path Same priority for switches Highest priority for switch A bridge identification 2 Root path Same priority for Highest priority for e individual ports port2 Root path Lowest port number A 2 Root path Path to root switch is determined Figure 5 16 Flowchart for specifying the root path 5 2 5 7 Extended Configuration It may be useful to actively specify the topology that is formed due to the Spanning Tree Protocol and to not leave it to the random MAC addresses of the switches involved Non blocking blocking data paths can thus be influenced and a load distribution specified It may also be useful to explicitly disable the Spanning Tree Protocol at ports that do not participate in Spanning Tree so as to benefit from the fast forwarding function The Spanning Tree Protocol must also be disabled at individual ports if two different network segments both using Spanning Tree are to be coupled via these ports without the two tree structures merging into a large Spanning Tree 5 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_09 Rapid Spanning Tree Specifying the Root Switch The root switch is assigned via the assignment of an appropriate priority for the Spanning Tree segment Set the highest priority lowest
37. 1 4346 11 11 3 0 7 Sent each time the status of the POF SCRJ port changes trapPoEPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 8 Sent each time the status of the PoE port changes trapManagerConnection 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 99 Trap to test the connection between the SNMP agent and the network management station 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 3 2 Diagram of SNMP Management Management station SNMP management SNMP traps Management objects organized in MIBs IPHCENIX M 1 CONTACT S o hA e s MIB vi z Pals SUNU s E Ae 687407022 Figure 4 47 Diagram of SNMP 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 43 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 3 2 1 Tree Structure of the MIB 0 std 8802 iso8802 1 ieee802dot1 1 ieee802dot1mibs 2 lldpMIB 1 mib 2 3 snm
38. 1 4346 11 11 4 1 8 Syntax Integer32 1 4094 Access Read and write Description If the switch is operated in Tagging VLAN mode this object indicates in which VLAN VLAN ID the management agent is located flWorkNetPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 flWorkNetPortCapacity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Contains the number of available ports depending on the configuration of the MMS flWorkNetPortTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 flWorkNetPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 Description Generates a table with a detailed description of the port configuration flWorkNetPortIndex 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 77 FL SWITCH MM HS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Specifies the port number of the selected port fiWorkNetPortLinkState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 2 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Indicates the port status Connected 1 Not connected 2 farEndFault 3 fiWorkNetPortSpeed OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 3 Syntax Gauge32 Access Read Description Contains the data transmission rate of the selected port in bps fiWorkNetPortDuplexMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the duplex mode of the selected port No link 0 Full duplex 1 Half duplex 2 fiWorkNetPortNegotiation OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 5 Syntax Inte
39. 1300 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 2001 11 36 km glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 36 dB km 32 km glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 4 dB km 26 km glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 5 dB km 15 0 dBm 9 125 um 8 0 dBm 9 125 um gt 31 dBm 9 125 um gt 7 dBm 9 125 um 100 Mbps 1 FL IF TX POF 100 2 FL IF 2POF 100 F SMA female connectors on the interface module 10 100 Mbps 650 nm 1m 50 m polymer fiber with F K 980 1000 230 dB km PHOENIX CONTACT 11 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Ethernet Interfaces POF SMA Continued Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Average dynamic receiver sensitivity fiber type in link mode Minimum Optical overrange Ethernet Interfaces HCS Number Connection format Data transmission rate Wavelength Transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Average dynamic receiver sensitivity fiber type in link mode Minimum Optical overrange Ethernet Interfaces SCRJ With Optical Diagnostics Number Connection format Data transmission rate Wavelength Laser protection Minimum cable length Transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Average dynamic receiver sensitivity fiber type in link mode Minimum Optical overrange Cable Lengths Twisted pair Polymer fiber POF H
40. 166 0 6 flpraxy koffer de 192 168 0 3 4 Funksiersbeschreibung Factory Line Switch F r PROFINET bo E 8 8 86 I Nicht verbunden Stationsnane 10 Device ibi Acte de 192 163 0 4 PROFINET 10 CE BB ibio kcffer de 192 168 0 5 9999999 ge INTERBUS BR iue iL AL zt PROFINET eratename A swiitch min hs kof fer Ce 255 255 255 0 kualisieruncs Geretekatalog OO OPTOSUB 2MBD By PROFINET IO 29 INTERBUS Prosy 4 ID Cortieller Sg IO Device H FLIL24BE PH PAERev gt 10 010 Weg DN DN DN DN DN pu i Tenehmememe Te DN SSS EEE DN DN DN DN 5 ez MI FLSWITCH MM HS Rew 1090 1 i Bil ILB PH 24 Dip DIOIG 2T Aew 10 01 HE PSM BL AFCA ga RL EA PROFINET Einstellungen 4t Busschnitstellen 2 Datenblatt RE statusdaten Ger tekatalog Die Datei CiVProgramne bemeinsaane Dateien FDCALLOVPROFINET Phoenix Contacti l switch om hs xml wurde erfolgreich importiert urea bei Cd 3T keode Fehler A Wamungen A Infos A SFE Fehler A Drucken A Buskonfigurator Dr cken Se F1 F r Hilfe d Figure 8 2 The switch in the bus configuration under PC WorX If the switch is not listed in the device catalog the device description provided by Phoenix Contact must be imported The latest device description can be downloaded at www download phoenixcontact com If the device description is available in the device catalog the following options are available for bus configuration
41. 2 1 1 2 0 Object identifier Read The authorization identification for the manufacturer of the network management subsystem which is integrated in this device This value is located in the SMI enterprises subtree 1 3 6 1 4 1 and describes which type of device is being managed For example if the manufacturer Phoenix Contact GmbH is assigned subtree 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 it can then assign its bridge the identifier 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 sysUpTime 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 0 TimeTicks Read The time in hundredths of seconds since the last network management unit reset PHOENIX CONTACT 4 45 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 46 PHOENIX CONTACT sysContact 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 0 Octet string size O 255 Read and write The textual identification of the contact person for these managed nodes and information on how this person can be contacted sysName 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 5 0 Octet string size O 255 Read and write A name for this node assigned by the administrator According to the agreement this is the fully qualifying name in the domain sysLocation 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 0 Octet string size O 255 Read and write The physical location of this node e g Hall 1 3rd floor sysServices 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 7 0 Integer 0 127 Read Indicates a numb
42. 3 1 4 Syntax Integer 0 5 Access Read 4 82 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Description Configuration and Diagnostics This object contains the detected PoE class of the connected device to the selected port Class 0 Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 O PS Ob fiWorkNetPortPoEOutputCurrent OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 5 Integer 1 400 Read This object contains the current value of the output current in mA of the selected port flWorkNetPortPoEOutputVoltage OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 6 Integer32 45000 56000 Read Indicates the current output voltage at this port in mV flWorkNetPortPoEFaultStatus OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 7 Integer Read Here you can view the current error status of the port No error Error in the external PoE supply voltage Temperature too high Current limitation activated Load disconnected The PoE controller does not respond 48 V supply may be missing No PoE interface module inserted in this slot The switch does not support PoE interface modules No PoE devices connected to this port CONDOR WN CH flWorkNetPortPoEFaultMonitoring OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 8 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable PoE fault monitoring message via display and alarm contact for the relev
43. 4 7 4346 TT TT 3 0 38 see PL Zwei TCH M MI B from this device to a trap receiver using the button below Enter password SNMP Configuration web page This part of the table is used to view or modify the IP addresses of the two trap receivers 6874 en 09 Trap Configuration 6874 en 09 SNMP Trap Connection Test D amp a Configuration and Diagnostics The send traps function can be disabled individually here Once the send traps function has been activated and the trap manager has been defined using the IP addresses test traps can now be sent using Execute to test the communication path from the switch to the trap receiver Software Update Menu This page is used to view or modify the parameters for a software update and to trigger the update Software Update TFTP Server IP Address TETP 0 0 0 0 Downloadable File Mame TFTP Update Status Ma information available To start the new software the device must be rebooted Note The device reboots with the last stored configuration save here before Enter password Apply Figure 4 18 Software Update web page During a firmware update the current status is shown on the MMS display 03 Downloading firmware via the network 04 Saving the firmware in the MMS Flash memory 05 The new firmware has been saved successfully Display goes out bo Device is booting and loading new firmware in the RAM Following a firmware
44. 4 Naming the Re 8 5 8 2 5 Operating in the PROFINET Environment 8 5 8 3 PROFINE TIAS uiua cts a rale tute rea oos toties uod been eode tates diui dut 8 6 8 3 1 Alarms 1n VW BIVI E 8 6 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT iii FL SWITCH MM HS 9 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Hrotocol 9 1 9 1 Ey ASICS m DNA Rp Tc P Mc PR 9 1 9 2 Representation of the Topology in an Engineering Tool 9 4 10 DACP IXelay AOL ee 10 1 10 1 Activating the DHCP Relay Agent 10 1 11 skeennical Data and Ordering Data EE 11 1 iB OM Eller IR 11 1 11 2 Typical MMS Current Consumption Example sees sss 11 5 tko Ordeno B EE 11 7 11 4 Ordering Data for GL Certified Components GL Certificate No 24 2750 4 HH 11 8 iv PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System 1 Modular Managed Switch System Transmission method 6874 en 09 Unless stated otherwise all information in this manual is valid for the FL SWITCH MM HS and FL SWITCH MM HS M as well as for the FL MXT and FL MXT M 1 1 Properties The Modular Managed Switch Modular Managed Switch System MMS is an Ethernet switch which is suitable for industrial use and consists of a head station extension modules and interface modules The head station and extension modules contain the entire Ethernet switching technology Interface modules provide the interface to the desired physical transmission method An extension module can
45. 4 bits for the port priority and 12 bits for the port number The port ID is interpreted as an unsigned integer value When comparing two port IDs the one with the lowest numeric value is of higher i e better priority R STP Port Configuration Part Number Module Interface Port Name SIF Port State STF Enable Operational Edge Port Admin Edge Port Priority Admin Path Cost Path Cast Forward Transitions Designated Root Designated Bridge Designated Part Designated Cast H5 x1 Port 1 forwarding Disable Enable Operating as an edge port Mon Edge Port 9 Edge Part 128 0 up to 240 in steps of 15 jo 1 up to 200 000 000 0 forces default path cost 13 5 S000 00 40 45 00 94 1F Bann On AD 45 D0 84 1F BUD Part Priority 128 Part Number 1j 0 RENE Enter password Protocol Compatibility Port Made Fart is in the Rapid Spanning Tree mode Port Configuration of part 1 General Security PoE FISTP VLAN Enter password Figure 5 7 R STP Port Configuration Port Number Indicates the number of the port currently selected Port Name Indicates the name of the port STP Port State Indicates the status in which this port takes part in STP Operational Edge Port Indicates whether this port is operated as an edge port 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree Admin Edge Port Here you can specify whether this port is to be operated as an edge port default setting
46. 425 in 1 127 mm 5 000 in 127 mm 5 000 in bh PHCENIX CONTACT gi Se It CH Ile CT BEER E gt ag See SN 114 5 mm 4 488 in N Gm I KI Gm INL TF q omini o E lO co ME ex E E LO LO s E LO N Vi E E CH ka 68740013 Figure 1 7 MMS housing dimensions in millimeters 1 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System ERS Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for GL Certified Operation 68740049 Figure 1 8 MMS housing dimensions in millimeters Housing Dimensions of the Converter Board With Interface Module 110 5 mm 4 330 in X i V ONANAN IS o N 90 mm 3 543 in 68740014 Housing width 67 mm Figure 1 9 Housing dimensions of the FL CB IF converter board 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 11 FL SWITCH MM HS 1 1 6 Assignment of Ports to Slots LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK M
47. An extended IP address is generated from the user address and subnet mask Because the masked subnetwork is only recognized by the local computers this extended IP address appears as a standard IP address to all the other devices Structure of the Subnet Mask The subnet mask always contains the same number of bits as an IP address The subnet mask has the same number of bits in the same position set to one which is reflected in the IP address for the network class Example An IP address from Class A contains a 1 byte network address and a 3 byte computer address Therefore the first byte of the subnet mask may only contain ones The remaining bits three bytes then contain the address of the subnetwork and the computer The extended IP address is created when the bits of the IP address and the bits of the subnet mask are ANDed Because the subnetwork is only recognized by local devices the corresponding IP address appears as a normal IP address to all the other devices Application If the ANDing of the address bits gives the local network address and the local subnetwork address the device is located in the local network If the ANDing gives a different result the data telegram is sent to the subnetwork router Example for a Class B subnet mask Decimal notation 255 255 192 0 Binary notation 1111 1111 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000 0000 Subnet mask bits Class B Using this subnet mask the TCP IP protocol software diff
48. C Cable interrupt cccccecccseseecceeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeees 3 10 Cascading style sheets Level 1 4 11 Change Password cccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseseeeeesaaeeees 4 18 ClASS O ets 4 34 err 4 34 Clear Memory Module 4 24 Configuration Comparson enni 4 23 Configuration during booting 4 23 ConrigaureUorn Tile a aedes tet vies acceda eds 4 22 Connecting the 48 V PoE supply voltage 3 26 Connecting the F SMA connectors 3 12 Connecting the RJ45 connectors 3 10 Connecting the SC D connectors 3 17 3 29 Connecting the ST connectors 3 18 Converter Doar venta eoe cef mo Mees 1 4 Counter states seeesseeessseeeeeeeeenee nnne 4 28 CRC EMOS e pec hots ected cused ae 3 31 i ME 4 116 D BER cM E DE 2 12 Bre mcr T TAS ey Oe ete eaters 4 15 Default prorty 3 32 Default Settings uo tad e e crure s 3 1 Default upon delen 3 1 DeslgridtedDOFL side eit Dr isa eno dto su detad ated eens 5 26 Destination address nnonnnannannnennnnnnennnnneennnenne 3 31 Destination address field 3 31 Destination OL uicit eae Ie tn rn 4 31 Devcerepnlacement 4 23 DHCP e sett xai ipd Ree Nene tubus 4 15 DHOP lease time 0nnnnannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennn
49. DHCP client PHOENIX CONTACT 10 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 10 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 10 1 0 1 Disabling the Relay Agent According to the Port In firmware Version 4 50 or later the DHCP relay agent function can be disabled according to the port No DHCP option 82 packets are sent by the deactivated ports DHCP Relay Agent Status Disable Enable DHCP Server Address DHCP option 62 Remote ID IP Address O MAC Address Operating Status DHCP Relay Agent has been disabled Active on ports 1 8 The switch is able to act as a DRAGE Relay Agent When acting as OCP relay agent this switch wil add an DHCP option S2 field to every broadcasted DHCP Hequest or DHCPF Discover it receives and will forward this modified message to the DACP server you can configure on this web page After receiving a reply from the LE server the switch will strip off the DHCP option 82 data and send the reply to the DIHCP client that has originated the DHCP Request or DIHCP Offer The option 82 Held wil Carne Circuit ID in the format xssaabbbb 4 Orte where Uxegea is the VLAN ID the chent is located in and xbbb5b ts the pomtnumber the chent is attached to The option 82 field wil also cany the Remote ID of this switch which can on your choice be its MAC Address or its IP Address Please note that the DACP Relay Agent can not be used together with iP address assignment by the DCH Client function see General Configuration IP Configuration Enter passwo
50. Duplex 10 MBit Full Duplex O 100 MBit Half Duplex 100 MBit Full Duplex Disable Enable Enter password Apply Port Configuration of port General Security PoE R STP VLAN Port Statistics of part General Figure 4 34 Port Configuration web page PHOENIX CONTACT 4 27 FL SWITCH MM HS Ports Port Statistics Menu This menu provides detailed statistical information about the volume of data for each individual port On this page additional counter states can be set to zero for all ports Port Statistics Fart Number ps Fackets 124055 up ta b4 Octets 423507 65 ta 127 Octets FBO24 128 to 255 Octets 3120 256 ta 511 Octets Ban 512 ta 1023 Octets 153 1024 to 1518 Octets es Broadcast 1560 Multicast 51654 Octets 10767201 Fragments D Undersized Packets Oversized Packets H CRC Alignment Errors Drop Events D Jabbers Collisions Clear counters You can set the statistic counters of all switch ports to zero Port Configuration of part b General Security PoE RISTE VLAN Note This web page will be refreshed in 22 sec automatically change the interval at the web nage Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 4 35 Port Statistics web page 4 28 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Ports POF Port Table Menu The information available for the POF SCRJ interface modules is displayed on this page POF SCRJ transceiver
51. Integer32 1 1024 Read Contains the index of the target component which should receive the traps fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDestlPAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 1 2 Syntax IP address Access Read and write Description Contains the IP address of the target component which should receive the traps fI WorkFWCtrlTrapDestCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 2 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Contains the maximum permissible number of trap receivers fI WorkFWCtrlTrapDestEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to disable the send SNMP traps function Sending permitted 2 Sending not permitted 1 fI WorkFWCtrlTrapLink OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 4 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here you can specify that the LinkUp Down trap is extended to include a physical port number Without extension With extension 1 fI WorkFWCtrlTrapConnectionTest OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 5 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 91 FL SWITCH MM HS Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here test traps can be sent for a connection test by the SNMP agents Sending test traps 2 No test traps 1 fI WorkFWCtrlTrapEnableTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 fIWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 Syntax Access Description Generates a table with i
52. LEDs per port with switchable information ensure that you always have sufficient local information A web server and an SNMP agent are provided for diagnostics maintenance and configuration via the network A terminal access point can be used for local operation Port mirroring can be used to monitor data traffic on the network connections Modular structure Depending on your requirements you can create a compact switch for the control cabinet with convenient connections on the front or a switch for the terminal box with connections at the bottom It is also possible to add a glass fiber interface or extend your existing station from 8 16 ports to a maximum of 24 ports Figure 1 2 Possible system hardware 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System Central element FL SWITCH MM HS FL SWITCH MM HS M A E Features and Fields of Application of the FL SWITCH MM HS Increased network performance by filtering data traffic Local data traffic remains local he data volume in the network segments is reduced Easy network expansion and network configuration Coupling segments with different transmission speeds Automatic detection of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data transmission rate with auto crossing Increased availability through the use of redundant transmission paths with Rapid Spanning Tree Support of various topologies and meshed structures as well as ring topologies with special ring detection Fast swi
53. LOS implemented 69409038 fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfSerialNumber OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 19 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description This object provides the serial number of the POF SCRYJ transceiver at this port fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfDatecodeAndLot OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 20 Syntax Octet Access Read Description This object provides the manufacturing date and the delivery number of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port as a byte pattern Byte 1 and 2 Year Byte 3 and 4 Month Byte 5 and 6 Day Byte 7 and 8 Delivery number 4 86 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flWorkFirmware 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 fIWorkFWinfo 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 flWorkFWinfoVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 1 Octet string 4 Read Contains the firmware version as a string Example for Version 3 97 0x33 0x2e 0x39 0x37 flWorkFWinfoState 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 2 Octet string 6 Read Contains the firmware release as a string Example for beta 0x62 0x65 0x64 0x61 flWorkFWinfoDate 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 3 Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation date of the firmware version as a string Example for 21 05 2001 0x32 0x31 0x30 0x35 0x30 0x3
54. Modular Managed Switch MMS Unknown Unknown 192 158 D 45 2559 255 A5 0 0 0 0 Device Information web page General Menu This page contains a range of static information about the device and the manufacturer Technical Data Menu This page lists the main technical data Hardware Installation Menu This page contains a connection diagram for connecting the redundant power supply and the alarm contact Local Diagnostics Menu This page describes the meaning of the switchable diagnostic and status indicators and lists the various display options for the 7 segment display Serial Port Menu This page lists the transmission parameters for serial communication 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 13 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 2 3 3 General Configuration IP Configuration Menu This page displays the set IP parameters management VLAN ID and addressing mechanism IR The management VLAN ID specifies in which VLAN the switch can be accessed if it is operating in Tagging VLAN mode To change the IP parameters via WBM Static assignment must be selected IP Configuration Current Addresses IP Address 192 158 D 45 subnet Mask 2S ssi Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Please enter IF Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address in dotted decimal notation eg 172 16 16 230 Management vlan ID 0001 Default VLAN T Note The Management Wian JD is only Important for access to the management agent web server same ag
55. PHOENIX CONTACT Ports with Forbidden status do not belong to the selected VLAN and cannot be added dynamically to this VLAN via GVRP None Ports with None status are not integrated into the VLAN 7 4 2 VLAN Port Configuration Port specific VLAN settings can be made on this web page VLAN Port Configuration Part Mumber Module HS Interface Al Port Name Part 1 Port VLAN ID Fart Priority Ingress Filtering Disable Enable GVRP Status Disable 9 Enable The Port VLAN ID and Port Pronty will be assigned to any untagged data coming into this port Enter password o Apply Port Configuration of port 1 General Security PoE RISTE WLAN Figure 7 4 VLAN Port Configuration Menu If Ingress Filtering is set to Enable the switch rejects data packets received at this port if is not a tagged member or untagged member of the VLAN with the VLAN ID contained in the tag of the packet Port Priority corresponding tag indicating the priority is added to packets without tags Port VLAN ID Assignment of received untagged packets to a VLAN The corresponding VLAN ID must be set for the ports that are untagged members of a VLAN see Example Communication between termination devices via VLAN on page 7 8 Only IDs of existing VLANs can be set as the port VLAN ID If a VLAN is deleted all port VLAN IDs that are set to this VLAN are reset to the default VLAN ID 1 6874 en 09
56. Port Table web page LA En zo 35 When setting the transmission mode make sure that the same settings have been made at both ends of the connection If the settings are not the same this can result in increased collisions or CRC errors and can adversely affect network performance Ports Port Configuration Table Menu This menu provides an overview of the important configuration settings for all ports and also provides the option to set the status transmission mode and link monitoring function for all existing ports 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 25 FL SWITCH MM HS Port Configuration Table Module Interface Port Status Modus n ERI gt SES 2 s EET e Enter password Figure 4 33 Port Configuration Table web page Ports Port Configuration Menu Offers individual configuration options for each port 35 Even if the port is switched off the Link LED for the port remains active 4 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Port Configuration Part Number Module Interface Type Part Name Status Priority Level Link State Negotiation Mode speed Duplex Made Port Modus Link Monitoring Configuration and Diagnostics HS Ad TX 10 100 Port Disable 9 Enable O Low High connected auto 100 MES full Note for the installation of Ethernet cables Auto Crossover is supported only in the Auto Megotiation model Auto Negotiation 10 MBit Half
57. SNMPv2 MIB SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB P bridge MIB Q bridge MIB RSTP MIB LLDP MIB and private SNMP objects from Phoenix Contact FL SWITCH M MIB Network management stations such as a PC with the Factory Manager can read and modify configuration and diagnostic data from network devices via the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP In addition any SNMP tools or network management tools can be used to access Factory Line products via SNMP The MIBs supported by the relevant device must be made available to the SNMP management tools On the one hand these are globally valid MIBs which are specified and described in RFCs Request for Comments This includes for example MIB2 according to RFC 1213 which is supported by all SNMP compatible network devices On the other hand manufacturers can specify their own private SNMP objects which are then assigned to a private manufacturer area in the large SNMP object tree Manufacturers are then responsible for their own private enterprise areas i e they must ensure that only one object is assigned to an object ID object name and parameters and can be published If an object is no longer needed it can be labeled as expired but it cannot be reused with other parameters under any circumstances Phoenix Contact provides notification of ASN1 SNMP objects by publishing their descriptions on the Internet Reading SNMP objects is not password protected However a password is required for read
58. The device accomplishes a reboot to load the last stored configuration Load Figure 4 26 Load the last stored configuration web page Enter password Configuration Management File Transfer Menu Configuration file transfer This option can be used to save your device configuration on a PC or to operate the switch using a saved configuration Configuration file transfer TFTP serer IP address TRIP noon 5 File After a successful file transfer from the host to the device the switch must be rebooted to activate the new configuration You find the Reboot function on the web page Switch Station Services Enter password start Figure 4 27 Configuration file transfer web page When a configuration is uploaded from the MMS to a PC the last saved version is transmitted If you want to transmit the active configuration first save it again Save current configuration function When a configuration is downloaded from the PC to a MMS the new configuration is only activated once the switch has been reset The use of a configuration file does not affect an existing old password 4 amp amp 4 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Memory Module Configuration comparison Es Clear Memory Module 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Device Replacement Configuration using a configuration file is used when replacing devices To duplicate devices using a configuration
59. Tree is not used rather just Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol R STP Example In the following network topology six redundant paths have been created to ensure access to all network devices in the event of a data path failure These redundant paths are impermissible loops The Spanning Tree Protocol automatically converts this topology into a tree by disconnecting selected ports In this context one of the switches is assigned the role of the root of the tree From this root all other switches can be accessed by via a single data path REE CONTACT Lid CONTACT EE ee EE LZ EE ve BEES TUTTI i H i H H H i 1 i 1 a KR 1 2 TUTE RH mmm IOtj Ono ot I Q1 TE TD ee SS penx ooo EE 33 88 cc EE EH m ze We ste ESCH TTITTIT ni o Wall Je SU
60. Tree support A connection via one or more additional hubs that do not support Spanning Tree Furthermore a data path can also consist of a connection of a Spanning Tree switch to A termination device A network segment in which no loops may occur which consists of several infrastructure components hubs or switches without Spanning Tree support PHOENIX CONTACT 5 15 FL SWITCH MM HS For the last two data path options no specific precautionary measures are necessary If necessary the Fast Forwarding option can be used for the relevant ports see Fast Forwarding on page 5 13 For the first three cases the following rules must be observed Rule 1 Spanning Tree transparency for all infrastructure components All infrastructure components used in your network that do not actively support Spanning Tree must be transparent for Spanning Tree messages BPDUs and must forward all BPDUs to all ports without modifying them When Spanning Tree is disabled the switch is transparent for BPDUs Rule2 Atleast one active Spanning Tree component per loop An active Spanning Tree component supports the Spanning Tree Protocol sends receives and evaluates BPDUs and sets its ports to the relevant STP states Each loop in a network must have at least one active Spanning Tree component to disintegrate the loop
61. User Interfaces Virtual LAN 2 Create the required VLANs on the Static VLANs web page 3 On the VLAN Port Configuration Table web page assign the ports for incoming packets to individual VLANs using the VLAN ID 4 On the IP Configuration web page the desired management VLAN ID can now be set 5 On the General VLAN Configuration web page set the switch to Tagging VLAN mode 6 Save the configuration on the General Configuration Configuration Management web page and restart the switch 7 2 2 2 Configuration in Tagging Mode Usually Used to Change the Management VLAN ID in the Event of an Existing VLAN Configuration 1 Connect the PC directly to the switch to be configured via a port A whose VLAN ID is set to 1 2 Update the firmware to Version 4 03 or later and restart the switch 3 Placeanother port B in the desired management VLAN Port B must be an untagged member of the desired management VLAN Set the corresponding port VLAN ID if necessary 4 Set the desired VLAN ID as the management VLAN 5 Connect your PC to the switch via port B and save the configuration 7 3 General VLAN Configuration Basic settings for VLAN operation can be made on the Switch Station VLAN General VLAN Configuration web page In Transparent mode the switch processes the incoming data packets as described in the Frame Switching section see Section 3 3 on page 3 31 Neither the structure nor the contents of the data pack
62. a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps and full duplex mode and link monitoring is not activated for the glass fiber ports If a glass fiber interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been 33 parameterized the existing configuration remains active The data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps The duplex method is set to full duplex If the module is removed auto negotiation is enabled 3 2 5 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a glass fiber 35 path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off Far End Fault Detection indicates that the connection in the direction of the partner is not OK the partner does not indicate a link and therefore at least one fiber within the glass fiber cable is faulty or has not been assembled correctly 3 2 5 3 Connecting the ST Connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until 33 just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors Figure 3 15 Connecting the ST connectors 3 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 2 5 4 Glass Fiber Connectio
63. access in SNMP but this is set to public which is usual for network devices and cannot be modified By default upon delivery the password for write access is private and can be changed by the user SNMP the web interface Telnet and the serial terminal all use the same password which can be changed by the user 6874 en 09 OID Description OID Description OID Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Another benefit for the user is the option of sending traps using the Simple Network Management Protocol Management Information Base MIB Database which contains all the data objects and variables required for network management Agent An agent is a software tool which collects data from the network device on which it is installed and transmits this data on request Agents reside in all managed network components and transmit the values of specific settings and parameters to the management station On a request from a manager or on a specific event the agent transmits the collected information to the management station Traps Traps are spontaneous SNMP alarm or information messages which are sent by an SNMP compatible device when specific events occur Traps are transmitted with maximum priority to various addresses if required and can then be displayed by the management station in plain text The IP addresses that are to receive these traps trap targets receivers must be set by the user o
64. as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Es Startup and Functions 3 2 7 3 Functions of the Twisted Pair Interface Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 2 7 4 Network Connecti
65. at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts 3 Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 2 1 3 Connecting the RJ45 Connectors Insert the RJ45 male connector into the female connector according to the keying until it snaps into place To remove the connector press the snap in device in the direction of the connector A and then remove the connector 68740016 Figure 3 5 Connecting the RJ45 connectors Industrial RJ45 Connector With Additional Latching The figure below shows the VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 which can be snapped directly onto the interface module Figure 3 6 Using the VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 3 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 2 1 4 Assignment of the RJ45 Female Connector TP TX n c Pins RJ45 n c Pn TD Pin6 Bm nc Pin5 l n c Pin4 EN TD Ping T RD Pin2 RD Pm Figure 3 7 Assignment of the RJ45 female connector 3 2 2 FL IF 2POF 10 100 Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 2 2 1 Default Upon Delivery
66. been executed 35 The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written flWorkNetifParamStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 5 Integer32 1 1024 Read Indicates whether the IP parameters have been modified but not saved No change Address setting modified but not yet activated 35 Address settings must be saved permanently using the fI WorkFWCtrlConfSave object flWorkNetilfParamSave 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 6 Integer Read and write Provides the option of saving modified IP parameters or undoing the modifications Undo modification Activate modification 35 Address settings must be saved permanently using the fIWorkFWCtrlConfSave object 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flWorkNetlfParamAssignment OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Provides the option of modifying the assignment mechanism for IP parameters Static IP address 1 Assignment via BootP 2 Assignment via DHCP 3 Assignment via DCP 4 35 Modifications to the assignment mechanism also affect the management functions via the web interface via V 24 RS 232 and Telnet 35 Modifications to the assignment mechanism on BootP 2 or DCP 4 are only activated after a restart of the MMS 35 Address settings must be saved permanently using the fI WorkFWCtrlConfSave object flWorkNetlfParamManagementVlanld OID 1 3 6 1 4
67. captureBufferPacketStatus 4 3 4 9 event 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 9 The event group controls the generation of traps when the alarms described above occur 1 eventTable 1 eventEntry 1 eventindex 2 eventDescription 3 eventType 4 eventCommunity 5 eventLastTimeSent 6 eventOwner 7 eventStatus 2 logTable 1 logEntry 1 logEventlndex 2 logindex 3 logTime 4 logDescription 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 57 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 58 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 3 5 4 3 5 1 Bridge MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 dot1dBase 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 1 The dot1dBase group contains bridge specific information 4 3 5 2 8 dot1dStpMaxAge De Ze 1 d dot1dBasePortEntry 1 dot1dBasePort 2 dot1dBasePortlflndex 3 dot1dBasePortPortCircuit 4 dot1dBasePortDelayExceededDiscards S 5 dot1dBasePortMtuExceededDiscards SST T dotidStp 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 2 1 dot1dStpProtocolSpecification 2 dot1dStpPriority 3 dot1dStpTimeSinceTopologyChange 4 dot1dStpTopChanges 5 dot1dStpDesignateRoot 6 dot1dStpRootCost 7 dot1dStpRootPort dot1dStpHoldTime dot1dStpForwardDelay dot1dStpBridgeMaxAge dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime dot1dStpBridgeForwardDelay dot1dStpPortTable 1 dot1dStpPortEntry 1 dot1dStpPort 2 dot1dStpPortPriority 3 dot1dStpPortState 4 dot1dStpPortEnable 5 do
68. dot3Compliance 4 3 10 4 IldpMIB 1 0 8802 1 1 2 1 IldpObjects 1 lldpConfiguration 1 IldpMessageTxlInterval 2 Ildp Message TxHoldMultiplier 2 lldpStatistics 3 lldpLocalSystemData 1 IldpLocChassisldSubType 2 ldpLocChassisld 3 IldpLocSysName 4 IldpLocSysDesc 5 IldpLocSysCapSupported 6 IldpLocSysCapEnabled 7 lldpLocPortTable 1 IldpLocPortMum 2 IldpLocPortldSubtype 3 IldpLocPortld 4 llApLocPortDesc 8 IldpLocManAddrTable 1 IldpLocManAddrSubtype 2 IldpLocManAddr 3 IldpLocManAddrLen 4 IldpLocManAdadrlfSubtype 5 IldpLocManAdadrifld 6 IldpLocManAddrOID 4 lldpRemoteSystemsData 1 IlqpRemTable 1 IldpRemTimeMark 2 ldpRemLocalPortNum 3 IlldpgRemlndex 4 IIdpRemChassisType 5 IldpRemChassisld 6 IldpRemPortldSubtype 7 lldpRemPortld 0 1 8 IlldpRemPortDesc 9 IIdpRemSysName IIdpRemSysDesc IIdpRemSysCapSupported 12 IldpRemSysCapEnabled 2 IldpRemManAddrTable 1 IlqpRemAddrSubSubtype 1 1 4 66 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 2 llqdpRemManAddr 3 llqdpRemManAddrifSubtype 4 IldpRemManAdarlfld 5 IlqpRemManAddrOID 5 IldpConformance 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 67 FL SWITCH MM HS Es Es OID OID 4 68 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 3 11 Private MIBs The private MIBs for the MMS
69. edu Gus 4 62 4 3 8 SEO MIB En Vi De WE 4 65 4 3 9 ANAL Type MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 30 cen Ae apte ac Rs 4 66 Z0 IEMNIBS3 6 1 2 1 9 AE WEE 4 66 ASA Private MIBS un dinde tete a a tocco iet sues 4 69 4 4 Management via Local V 24 RS 232 Communication Interface 4 116 4 4 1 General Function sees eene nennen nnns 4 116 4 4 2 User Interface FUnctlOns 5 pues dee EE EE 4 117 4 4 3 Starting With Faulty Software Firmware esses 4 120 4 5 Management via Teltigl iuis cfr reo terras ere d eed Eege 4 123 4 5 1 Configuring the Telnet Terminal cccccceccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaas 4 123 4 5 2 Telnet Interface Functions ccccceececcesseeeceeeeceescesseeeceeseeeeeaaeress 4 123 Rapid SPANNING TEC e RUD 5 1 5 1 General FUNCIO BE 5 1 5 2 EA Ke Tue EE 5 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Table of Contents 5 2 1 Enabling R STP on All Switches Involved sssssssee 5 2 5 2 2 Connection Failure Example eeseeeeeeee 5 11 5 2 3 Mixed Operation of RSTP and GIb 5 12 5 2 4 Topology Detection of a Rapid Spanning Tree Network RSTP 0 12 5 2 5 Configuration Notes for Rapid Spanning Tree 5 15 6 WIGITIGAS dd ligero rrr 6 1 6 1 Sie 6 1 6 2 Enabling the Web Pages for Multicast Filtering in WBM 6 1 6 3 Stat Eltere 6 1 6 3 1 Current Multicast Group
70. egene te ioc eod etettens 3 11 FIFPRO E Fia aou eset 3 24 SE eh e Ze 3 9 ELAESAMEM EAR RE 3 22 ELEAE DXIHICIS TOO oue intonat e ee 3 20 ELEIE TXIPOFESTOPTOO seii uan inae etn bet 3 19 FEMM etr TR NE 1 1 FL SWITCH MM HSM eeeeeeeeeen 1 1 FIOPDYCISK ICON RR PE 4 11 PIOW GOMU ON RON 2 12 Flowchart Assigning IP parameters 3 8 Flowchart after a restart 3 7 Forgotten your password sseeesseeeeeeere 4 18 Forward delay E 5 5 Selen EE 3 31 Fratre te le e BE 3 31 A 2 PHOENIX CONTACT SC ela ci METER 1 8 meii elo TD Masses cas 3 11 Function of the memory module 3 22 PUNCHOMN SWIC sci oe eek DO UE MEedUE 1 7 G E e E M 1 3 Glass fiber connection 3 17 3 29 GL certified operation 2 10 3 9 Grounding ee 2 12 H HCS e nt id eed b eorr ee ee 3 15 FUG SOW MENT 3 14 RelO TING Rm E 5 5 IER EE 3 3 FIGU DIU GUNG me WD cp 2 5 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 4 11 HyperTerminal eene 4 116 4 120 lana address family MIR 4 40 IANAifType MIB ccc cceecccceecceceeceeceeeeeeaeeeseeeeeaees 4 40 IEEE O02 RE 3 32 IEEE 002 e EEN 5 1 IEEE COZ DW te deem de e Leder Sette i ee 5 1 OO o cC 3 11 I MIB icio OD ecd os da ede bum ra buds 4 40 IGMP packets RETE 3 32 Illegal deese oec utat Rodeo ei Aes 4 31 Illegal Addr
71. enabled powered device connected to Al this port Ma fault detected Class 3 device 2 Ma PoE enabled powered device connected to this port ata Ma PoE enabled powered device connected to this port HS Missing A8 supply fault IG Missing 48 supply fault zn Figure 4 40 Power over Ethernet Port Table web page The following states are supported No error Error in the external PoE supply voltage Temperature too high A Current limitation activated Load disconnected The PoE controller does not respond 48 V supply may be missing No PoE interface module inserted in this slot The switch does not support PoE interface modules No PoE devices connected to this port Port Power over Ethernet Configuration PHOENIX CONTACT 4 33 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 34 PHOENIX CONTACT Ports Port Power over Ethernet Configuration Menu This menu can be used to set the port specific configuration settings for Power over Ethernet The PoE interface module is supported by firmware Version 4 0 or later Firmware Versions 4 0 treat the module as a standard RJ45 interface module The module can operate in PoE mode without management and without support from the firmware and hardware system bus No configuration options or diagnostic data are available The use of the PoE interface module requires the application of system bus firmware 5 00 or later i
72. etherStatsPkts 6 etherStatsBroadcastPkts 7 etherStatsMulticastPkts 8 etherStatsCRCAlignErrors 9 etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers etherStatsCollisions etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to5110ctets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 20 etherStatsOwner 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 e zx a i 2 1 et 1 s zt 1 1 etherStatsStatus 4 3 4 2 history 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 2 The history group contains statistical information which can be read and represented e g as a time curve 1 historyControlTable 1 historyControlEntry 1 historyControllndex 2 historyControlDataSource 3 historyControlBucketsRequested 4 historyControlBucketsGranted 5 historyControllnterval 6 historyControlOwner 7 historyControlStatus 2 etherhistoryTable 1 etherhistoryEntry 1 etherHistoryIndex 2 etherHistorySamplelndex 3 etherHistoryIntervalStart 4 etherHistoryDropEvents 5 etherHistoryOctets PHOENIX CONTACT 4 53 FL SWITCH MM HS 6 etherHistoryPkts 7 etherHistoryBroadcastPkts 8 etherHistoryMulticastPkts 9 etherHistoryCRCAlignErrors 10 etherHistoryUndersizePkts 11 etherHistoryOversizePkts 12 etherHistoryFragmen
73. existing groups The corresponding MAC address is then displayed in the Multicast Group Address text field The members of the group are indicated by the activated checkboxes Multicast Addresses Do not use multicast MAC addresses that are in the range from 01 00 5e 80 00 00 to 01 00 5e FF FF FF An incorrect MAC address format and the entry of non multicast addresses is indicated and the entry is not permitted Please note that in multicast MAC addresses the bytes are separated by a colon and IP multicast addresses are separated by a full stop 6874 en 09 Multicast Filtering 6 3 3 Procedure for Creating a Multicast Group Gain an overview of the multicast applications available within the network and the multicast addresses used Create a group for every multicast application or for the multicast address used and for each switch add the ports to which a device of the appropriate group is directly connected or via which the device can be accessed Example In the following table the ports for each switch to which the relevant receivers of the multicast data are connected are indicated with an X See example configuration Figure 6 3 on page 6 6 Table 6 1 Multicast port assignment to the switches Switch 7 Please note that possible redundant paths must be taken into consideration when using 35 Rapid Spanning Tree for multicast group creation 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 5 FL SWITCH MM HS 6 6 PH
74. for each port The function of the second LED MODE for each port can be set using a switch on the head station which controls all ports see also example below There are three options Green Sending receiving telegrams OFF Not sending receiving telegrams Green ON 100 Mbps mE 10 Mbps if Link LED is active Green lt duplex Duplex OFF Halfduplex if Link LED is active ACT and 100 and FD Green EN PROFINET device identification simultaneously ACT or 100 or FD Green Flashing No IP parameter present following restart selected by mode switch 1 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System Example In Figure 1 11 the LED indicators have the following meaning see also Assignment of ports to slots on page 1 12 A The switch has been set to display the duplex mode the mode LEDs now indicate that port 1 and port 3 are in full duplex mode and port 2 and port 4 are in half duplex mode B The switch has been set to display the data transmission rate the mode LEDs now indicate that port 1 and port 2 are operating at 10 Mbps port 3 is operating at 100 Mbps and port 4 is not operating at all d A Bae 1 EN EN 1 E3 EN ACT 100 Ba CXIX2 MINS CX 1 XZ AIN 2 m ADM KP ESS X2 LNK MODE SAL XI X gt ANS x1
75. io oce SR TOL eder inse dur 4 26 Pon Eet cm ss 4 25 Port based prioritization of data streams 3 32 ein en EE 2 3 Power over Ethernet Port Table 4 33 PONZANO BEE 3 32 miilena ome e 3 32 mite i es 3 32 miles MeV 3 32 Private WBS sci tea epocha ou po eee See 4 68 Processing rules ENEE ENEE 3 32 PRR OR INET e tm 4 15 PROFINET connection aannnannenennnennnnnnnennnnrnnnnnn 4 15 Protective CAS ER LT PS 3 14 EE 4 68 XC GION Alt cru eet ON aM Duci ipta 4 68 Ste lee EE 4 68 Q Q bridge MIB s siii tendono rentre 4 40 R Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree 5 1 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 5 1 Read Write access ccccccsececeeeceeseeceeseeeeeseeeesaneees 4 19 Read only access esee nnns 4 19 pice 4 24 Receive oueue nennen nnne nnn nnns 3 32 Redundancy mechanism ssesssssreerresrrresrreeerreeenee 5 2 Redundant 24 V DC eupphy 2 9 PHOENIX CONTACT A 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Redundant data paths annannnenneennennnnnnennnennnnnenne 5 1 Refresh Interval inne acing eere E Race oec ig Zeg 4 18 aic mE 2 3 RG GQUCS M CD ee 4 14 Required hardware annnnnnnnnnnnnosnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnreenne 1 6 Resetting to the default settings 4 119 4 125 RRG 1 21 E ma 4 40 RFG T219 MIB E 4 45 RMONMIB cT 4 40 Eil E
76. of 5 The destination port is operated at 10 Mbps Therefore with the same volume of data the destination port reaches a capacity of 50 Ports Port Security Menu In order to make individual settings for each port the Port Security function on the Switch Station Services page must first be activated The following options can be selected under Security Mode None No security settings for this port Trap only When a disabled MAC address accesses a port a trap is sent to the pre defined trap targets The port is not blocked A trap is sent for each MAC address that accesses a port illegally If this MAC address accesses this port again after the aging time has elapsed and the MAC address has been deleted from the MAC address table another trap is sent However if the duration of illegal access is shorter than the aging time only one trap is sent following the first access attempt Block packets Having received unauthorized packets the port is blocked for all packets A trap is sent which indicates the unauthorized access attempt The port remains blocked until the block is lifted by the administrator using the Unlock button on the Switch Station Ports Port Security page PHOENIX CONTACT 4 31 FL SWITCH MM HS Block packets with automatic reenabling Having received unauthorized packets the port is blocked for all packets A trap is sent which indicates the unauthorized access attempt After the agi
77. signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver RX RX Ti RX Im 100 m 328 08 ft ag ann TX TX HCS TX RX RX RX TX 100 m 328 08 ft TX TX Lm a HCS e ey 68740018 D Figure 3 12 HCS connection 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 15 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 4 FL IF 2FX SC FL IF 2FX SM SC Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the FL IF 2FX SM SC interface is removed and another interface type is inserted in its place the ports are set to auto negotiation 3 2 4 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted they are preset with a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps and full duplex mode and link monitoring is not activated for the fiber optic ports If a fiber optic interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been 35 parameterized the existing configuration remains active The data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps The duplex method is set to full duplex If the module is removed auto negotiation is enabled 3 2 4 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEE
78. supply X5 US1 GND US2 GND AG RT R2 X7 V 24 24 V DC 24 V DC 68740006 Figure 2 14 Supplying the system using two voltage sources 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 9 FL SWITCH MM HS 2 5 2 Connecting the Supply Voltage to the FL SWITCH MM HS M for GL Certified Operation For GL certified operation an NEF 1 3 filter for Environmental Category EMC2 or NEF 1 6 for EMC1 must be used and the components must be installed in a metal control cabinet 24 V DC The system is operated using a 24 V DC voltage which is applied at the head station If required the voltage can also be supplied redundantly see Figure 2 16 If redundant power supply monitoring is active default setting an error is indicated if 33 only one voltage is applied A bridge between US1 and US2 dotted line connection prevents this error message It is also possible to deactivate monitoring in web based management or via SNMP FL SWITCH MM HS Ord No 28 32 326 EN US2 I Fail V 24 Figure 2 15 Supplying the system using one voltage source 2 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Assembly and Installation Redundant 24 V DC supply PHCENIX ACT 100 FD CONTACT FL SWITCH MM HS Ord No 28 32326 d 00A0451BDD US1 GND US2 GND Eat IR Figure 2 16 Supplying the system using two voltage sources 2 5 3 Alarm Contact The switch has
79. the firmware on the device is faulty this firmware can still be updated see Starting With Faulty Software Firmware on page 4 120 4 4 2 2 Functions During Operation The following functions are available in the user interface Setting IP parameters Selecting the addressing mechanism Resetting to the default settings Activating deactivating the web server the Telnet function and SNMP Activating deactivating port security access control for web Switching the VLAN mode Switching the operating mode Activating deactivating the RSTP redundancy mechanism Reset The activation deactivation of the web server or Telnet function only takes effect after a SAVE and subsequent restart All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently 4 4 2 3 Structure of the User Interface Screens Login Screen Login Screen gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com Running switch application version X XX Password 68740010 6874_en_09 Figure 4 51 User interface login screen PHOENIX CONTACT 4 117 FL SWITCH MM HS The login screen indicates the version of the firmware used A password must be entered to make other settings By default upon delivery the password is private It is case
80. value in the Priority field on the STP Bridge Configuration page in WBM for the switch selected as the root switch Make sure that all the other network switches have a lower priority higher value Here the set path costs are not evaluated R STP Configuration Rapid Spanning Tree Status C Disable Enable Priority 32768 0 up to 61440 in steps of 4096 This bridge uses the following parameter if this bridge is the root bridge Maximum Age of STP 20 Information a s Bs up to 40s Hello Time 2 s 1s up to 10s Forward Delay fis s ds up to 30s Enter password Apply Figure 5 17 Specifying the root switch priority Specifying the Root Port or Designated Port The root port and designated port are always the ports with the lowest path costs If the costs are the same the priority is the decisive criterion If the priorities are also the same the port number is the decisive criterion Specify an appropriate combination of costs and priority on the STP Port Configuration page in WBM for the port specified as the root port or designated port Make sure that all the other network switches either have higher costs or a lower priority higher value 5 2 5 8 Disabling the Spanning Tree Protocol Using the Fast Forwarding Function be disabled for a port A termination device is connected to the port Additional infrastructure components are connected to the port The corresponding One of the following requi
81. web server Configure the port mirroring function If ports are set with the same value for the source and destination port mirroring will be disabled The source port is set to O Enter the destination port in the relevant multicast group in order to enable multicast packets to be received at the set destination port 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 9 FL SWITCH MM HS Extended Options Please select Please select A armcontact Display state Serial port Part configuration IF configuration Figure 4 11 Extended Options menu You can jump straight to the web interface from here via a selection menu The relevant function is described in Web Based Management WBM on page 4 11 and onwards Configuration 138 238 3 EI e La Figure 4 12 Configuration menu Various options are provided here for saving or loading the configuration 4 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Online diagnostics 6874 en 09 Es Es 4 4 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 2 Web Based Management WBM 4 2 1 General Function The user friendly web based management interface can be used to manage the switch from anywhere in the network using a standard browser Comprehensive configuration and diagnostic functions are clearly displayed on a graphic user interface Every user with a network connection to the device has read access to that device via a browser Depending on the physical structure of the switch a w
82. which are received by the Factory Manager and displayed in the message window If you are operating other devices in the same network messages from these devices may also be displayed Messages from Phoenix Contact Factory Line components can be easily identified by their MAC address which starts with 00 A0 45 and is provided on the devices Please check the MAC address in the messages to ensure the correct device is addressed PHOENIX CONTACT 4 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 2 Robot Control ncf Factory Manager Configuration wiew Device Messages D c Ed Fa 8 2 7 r Siss al dm sa Special Tools Licensing CAE Hh RI ee Bae e Order k ID Project Date i Save 4 1000 16 6 2003 10 03 56 SCT ory Manager started elete A 1001 10 6 2003 14 29 15 HN ory Manager stopped elete a ES 4001 Robo Contral ncf 10 6 2003 14 27 29 Oooh request received From unknown device MA Ki 4001 Bobo _Control ncf 10 6 2003 14 26 48 Filter SaatP request received From unknown device MA Ki 4001 Bobo Control ncf 10 6 2003 14 26 48 Print Oooh request received From unknown device MA Robo Ccontral ncF Message Queue m For Help press F1 PHOENIX CONTACT 10 6 2003 14 17 56 SnntP request received Fram unknown device MZ Zi Add new device Properties Network Scanner Pop Server Trap Receiver ITFTP Server E Figure 4 1 Messages from the MMS in the Factory Manager Right click on
83. you replace the memory module with another memory module within a few seconds there is no need to update the configuration comparison manually Here you can delete the memory module by entering a valid password PHOENIX CONTACT 4 23 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 24 Reboot Port security status PHOENIX CONTACT Clear Memory Module You can clear the Memory Module to get an empty module using the button below A switch with an empty Memory Module toads the configuration out of the non volatile memory of the Head Station during the startup phase A new contiguration Wil be stored in the Memory Module when you save the current configuration or the device is booting Clear Figure 4 30 Clear Memory Module web page Enter password 4 2 3 4 Switch Station Services Menu To trigger a reboot via the web interface enter a valid password Save the configuration beforehand so that configuration modifications are retained or can be activated via a restart Here you can globally activate deactivate the port security function The settings for the individual ports can be made on the Port Port Security web page Illegal Address Counter Here you can reset the counter that records the unauthorized access attempts to the device Services Reboot The device accomplishes a reboot Note The device reboots with the last stored configuration save here before Port Security Status Disable Enable You ha
84. 00000 nin gHHHBEE EELER 122345678 PB awnemuwmn le UE 224 7 TT TS 1 E mmm Kees bees Ei i TNK MODE TNK MODE TNK MODE LNK MODE IPHCENIX ACT 100 FD 120 1 o imo 2 E P CONTACT Ses cea tee FL SWITCH MM HS x x INKMODE LNKMODE LNKMODE SS 5 Fy 6 Si Th 6 S L S 3 d 2 i 3 z eo iE el I S o o E el 5 3 SL ss a hA 6 IPPHCENIX ES EH LL cxx am ee Ee ee eos T qu www KON 33A 53 SS css SS E 6 8 10 12 wu 1e FL SWITCH MM HS xi x2 xa x FEN TUTTI UgBHHUEEH Q DOOC0000 1 i Is 12345678 Jo wn 12 13 14 15 16 z 5 EE ITU Beie UE S BE gp Q wu TIER EET IRI 3 Seck aI ei 687407052 Figure 5 10 Connection failure with RSTP ring detection 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 11 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 2 3 Mixed Operation of R
85. 1 flWorkFWinfoTime 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 4 Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation time of the firmware version as a string Example for 14 10 20 0x31 0x34 0x31 0x30 0x32 0x30 flWorkFWinfoCopyright 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 5 Display string 6 Read Contains the owner of the firmware copyright Copyright by Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co 2003 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 87 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID 4 88 PHOENIX CONTACT flWorkFWinfoBootVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 6 Octet string 4 Read Contains the version of the boot loader as a string Example for Version 2 65 0x32 0x2e 0x36 0x35 flWorkFWinfoBootState 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 7 Octet string 6 Read Contains the boot loader release as a string Example for beta 0x62 0x65 0x64 0x61 fIWorkFWInfoBootDate 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 8 Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation date of the boot loader version as a string Example for 09 03 01 0x30 0x39 0x30 0x33 0x30 0x31 flWorkFWinfoBootTime 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 9 Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation time of the boot loader version as a string Example for 14 10 20 0x31 0x34 0x31 0x30 0x32 0x30 flWorkFWInfoOperStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 11
86. 11 3 0 2 Sent on each firmware related modification to the diagnostic display and contains additional information about the firmware status trapFWConf 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 3 Sent each time the configuration is saved and informs the management station that the configuration has been saved successfully This trap is sent in the event of configuration modifications port name port mode device name IP address trap receiver address port mirroring etc which are not yet saved permanently The trap also provides a warning that if not saved permanently the modifications will be lost on a reset The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written trapPowerSupply 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 4 Sent each time the redundant voltage supply fails trapSecurityPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 5 Sent each time a disabled MAC address accesses a port trapRstpRingFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 6 Sent in the event of a link interrupt in the redundant RSTP ring 6874 en 09 OID Description OID Description OID Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics trapPofScrjPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 7 Sent in the event of switch over to or from a critical state trapPoEPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 8 Always sent if the error status of a PoE port change
87. 2 Display web page 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 35 FL SWITCH MM HS 35 Click on Online Diagnostics to display the current view of the diagnostic display in a small browser window The display is renewed automatically after two seconds Diagnostics Alarm Contact Menu Here you can set whether and for which events the alarm contact can be used Alarm Contact Lee the alarm ER Disable 9 Enable open Event Monitoring Status Power Supply Disable 9 Enable ok Port Security C Disable 9 Enable ok PoE Fault Monitoring O Disable Enable failure See page Port PoE Table to get information about which port s have detected a PoE faut Link Monitoring 9 Disable Enable ok To activate the link monitoring per port see web page Switch Station Ports Port Cig Table Information about detected Ink failures by the tink monitoring feature you find in the column Link State at the web page Switch Station Ports Port Table Enter password 1 Apply Figure 4 43 Alarm Contact web page 35 Click on the Switch Station Ports Port Cfg Table link on Alarm Contact page in WBM to access the port configuration page 4 36 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Diagnostics Utilization Menu Here the network capacity of each individual port is displayed as a bargraph The display is automatically updated according to the refresh interval Utilization 100
88. 2 1 PEAR TXIHGOS 100 5 cinta teet t E a m Ee or erdt oen EU Aedes anos 3 20 3 2 8 SICH OI ER WE 3 22 3 2 9 E EE 3 24 3240 Ne Le ER WEE 3 28 3 3 miri Xel deas E T TS 3 31 3 3 1 Store and ForWaltQ a uoto Me oet Ast ates ea oon Seed easi rupe Cun sot Ebeds 3 31 3 3 2 Multi Address F Uhctlon EE 3 31 3 3 3 Learning Addresses ET 3 31 3 3 4 FP MOPIUIZAL ON ee Rr cT n 3 32 Configuration and DIAGNOSUCS sac coc P in penas oi toco E ed Ecce sena nS ufus den 4 1 4 1 FAClOry diuine c 4 1 4 1 1 General FUNCION mec P 4 1 4 1 2 Assigning IP Parameters kA 4 1 4 1 3 Configuration and Diagnostics ccccceseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeees 4 3 4 2 Web Based Management WNDM nnnssnsnnnnnnnnsnnnrrsrrrnrsrrrressrrrrssrrrrssrrrssrrrenseni 4 11 4 2 1 General gero ME E 4 11 4 2 2 Requirements for the Use of WM 4 11 4 2 3 Functions Information in WBM 4 12 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol NM 4 41 4 3 1 General FUNCOM ini E e p a aaa l 4 41 4 3 2 Diagram of SNMP Management a nnnnnannnnnennnenennnnnrnnnnrnrrrnrnnrrnennnee 4 44 4 3 3 REGTZTS MIB S MIB IE ruin E ere PE eene e aa e Hn trem om eei 4 46 4 3 4 RMON MIB 1 9 6 1 2 1 10 eire EU Prae orco ono ex uen es 4 53 4 3 5 Bridge MIB 1 9 6 2 T7104 siasesst ei dede t ode e dc tees et editores 4 59 4 3 6 pBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 sseseeseeeeeeee 4 61 4 3 7 abridgeMIB 1 9 6 1 2 1 TT e a betur tet debet
89. 346 11 11 15 3 3 Integer Read and write This object can be used to enable the switch to delete all entries from its IGMP table Do not delete IGMP table 1 Delete IGMP table 2 6874 en 09 OID OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchRSTPRingMAC OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchRS TPRingBlockPort OID Syntax Access Description fl amp witchRSTPRingRootPort OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchRS TPRingDesPort OID 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flSwitchRedundancy 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 flSwitchCtrIRSTPFastRingDetection 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 1 Integer Read and write This object can be used to specify whether you wish to use standard RSTP or also fast ring detection as well Standard RSTP 1 Fast ring detection flSwitchRSTPRingTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 fiSwitchRSTPRingEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 flSwitchRSTPRinglndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 1 Integer 1 1024 Read This object specifies the RSTP ring number 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 2 MAC address Read This object specifies the MAC address of the switch which forms the alternative port path in this ring 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 3 Integer32 Read This object specifies the number of the blocked port in this ring 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 4 Integer32 Read This object specifies the number of th
90. 46 11 11 11 2 5 11 flWorkFWCtriConfMemoryModuleStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 1 Integer Read This object can be used to request the status of the MMS memory module Memory module present 1 Memory module working to full capacity 2 Memory module not supported 3 Memory module not present 4 Faulty memory module 5 flWorkFWCtriConfMemoryModuleClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 2 Integer Read and write Here the memory module can be deleted Not deleted 1 Delete memory module 2 flWorkFWCtriConfMemoryModuleCompare 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 3 Integer Read and write Here the configuration comparison between the MMS and memory module can be triggered No comparison 1 Compare configuration 2 flWorkFWCtriConfMemoryModuleCompareStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 4 Integer Read Here the configuration comparison between the MMS and memory module can be requested Unknown Comparison still running Configuration is the same Configuration is not the same Memory module empty OO SS 05 b i A 4 98 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics fIWorkFWCtrlConfigMemilnfo 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 flWorkFWCtriConfigMemConfName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 1 Oc
91. 46 11 11 4 2 4 1 12 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power low warning message has been triggered Warning message not triggered 1 Warning message triggered 2 fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfManufacturer OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 13 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description This object provides the name of the manufacturer of the POF SCRYJ transceiver at this port fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfManufactOui OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 14 Syntax Octet string 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 85 FL SWITCH MM HS Access Read Description This object provides the IEEE manufacturer ID of the manufacturer of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf Revision OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 16 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description This object provides the version of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfWavelength OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 17 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object provides the wavelength in nm of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf TransceiverOptions OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 18 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object provides the implemented functions of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port as a bit pattern MSB LSB n SEENEN RATE SELECT implemented TX DISABLE implemented TX FAULT implemented RX
92. 5 SCRJ Modules in WBM Very detailed information about the SCRJ modules is available in WBM see Ports POF Port Table Menu on page 4 29 e g the port system reserve alarms or port states are displayed The following states can be displayed under Transceiver status System Hardware does not support diagnosable POF modules this hardware does not support POF SCRJ diagnostics No POF SCRJ Interface modules present no POF SCRJ module is plugged in POF SCRJ Interface module is present and OK the system reserve is greater than 2 dB and is displayed under RX system reserve POF SCRJ Interface module is present but the system reserve is low the system reserve is less than 2 dB but greater than O dB POF SCRJ Interface module is present but the system reserve is exhausted no system reserve available the received optical power is below the required minimum value 3 30 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Es Es Startup and Functions 3 3 Frame Switching The FL SWITCH MM HS operates in store and forward mode When receiving a data packet the switch analyzes the source and destination addresses The switch stores up to 8000 MAC addresses with an adjustable aging time of 10 to 825 seconds in its address table 3 3 1 Store and Forward All data telegrams that are received by the switch are saved and their validity is checked Invalid or faulty data packets 1522 bytes or CRC errors and f
93. 6 11 11 11 2 6 5 Integer Read Contains the selected flow control for the serial interface None 1 Hardware 2 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContact 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEvents 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventPowerSupply 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 1 Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the indication of redundant power supply failure via the alarm contact Monitoring disabled 1 Monitoring enabled 2 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventLinkState 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 2 Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the link down indication for the ports via the alarm contact Monitoring disabled 1 Monitoring enabled 2 35 The flWorkNetPortLinkMonitoring object can be used to set port monitoring individually for each port flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventSecurityPortBlocked 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 3 Integer Read and write Indication via the alarm contact if a disabled MAC address accesses a port Not activated 1 Activated 2 fI WorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventPoEFaultDetected 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 4 Integer Read and write Indication via the alarm contact if a PoE fault has occurred Indication via the ala
94. 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree Example with fast ring detection Geess ss ee ze cz 3 S o 3 2 R 5 5 3 e AN OOO O_o E Lee Wath cs Switch 4 Priority 40000 or ver Switch 3 Switch 1 TT v Priority Default Root br
95. 6874 en 09 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 7 4 3 VLAN Port Configuration Table This web page provides an overview of the main VLAN settings for the ports Clicking on the relevant port number opens the VLAN Port Configuration web page where the settings can be modified This table can be used to assign incoming packets to the created VLANs if the packets reached the port without VLAN tag Vian Port Configuration Table Module Interface Port PVID Prio Ingress Filtering TE 2 mu i i Ve ia 6 Dt ia 8 This table indicates what Port VLAN ID and Priority wil be assigned to any untagged data coming in each port Enter password e Apply Figure 7 5 VLAN Port Configuration Table menu 7 5 Creating Static VLANs Security recommendation Instead of using VLAN 1 for management it is recommended that a new separate VLAN is created for management Make sure that the administrator has access to this VLAN Warnings displayed when creating configuring VLANs indicate configuration errors An untagged port belongs to multiple VLANs The port assignment untagged and PVID do not match In order to create a VLAN the switches involved must be configured accordingly In the following example data traffic is to be enabled in VLAN 5 between termination devices A and B The type of termination device must be taken into consideration VLAN compatible processes tags or not VLAN compatible does not process tags
96. 71 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 72 PHOENIX CONTACT flWorkBasicURL 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 3 Display string Read Contains the URL of the device specific web page for WBM in the form of the currently set IP address flWorkBasicSerialNumber 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 4 Octet string 12 Read Contains the serial number of the device flWorkBasicHWRevision 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 5 Octet string 4 Read Contains the hardware version of the device flWorkBasicPowerStat 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 6 Integer32 1 1024 Read Contains status information about the connected supply voltages Unknown 1 Supply voltage 1 OK 3 Supply voltage 2 OK 4 Supply voltage 1 and 2 OK 5 flWorkBasicSystemBusversion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 7 Octet string 4 Read Contains the version number for the system bus flWorkBasicCompMaxCapacity 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 11 Integer 32 Read Contains the maximum number of interfaces that can be connected 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flWorkBasicCompCapacity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 12 Syntax Integer 32 Access Read Description Contains the number of interfaces actually connected flWorkComponents OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 fiWorkComponent
97. 9 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description flWorkFWCtriWebPageRefresh 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 8 Integer 0 3600 Read and write Here you can set the refresh time for the automatic update of the web pages in seconds Default 30s No update Os flWorkFWCtriISNMP 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 9 Integer Read and write Here you can activate deactivate the SNMP agent The modifications take effect following a restart SNMP agent deactivated 1 SNMP agent activated flWorkFWCtrlOperatingMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 10 Integer Read and write Pre configuration can be implemented here for PROFINET mode Standard mode default 1 PROFINET mode 2 fIWorkFWCtrllfCounters 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 11 Integer Read and write You can reset the statistic values here for all counters from all ports Not deleted 1 Delete counter 2 fI WorkFWCtrlTrapDest 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 fI WorkFWCtrlTrapDestTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDestEntry OID Syntax 4 90 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 1 6874 en 09 Access Description Configuration and Diagnostics Generates a table with the IP addresses of the trap managers fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDestlndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 1 1
98. AUTOMATIONWORX V RUN a a k i i 4 W 1 b e V Le User Manual FL SWITCH MM HSUME Order No 2699011 Modular Managed Switch System 0 D OO GD GD OGD COD 7 20 Gt INSPIRING INNOVATIONS AUTOMATIONWORX User Manual Description of the Hardware and Software Functions of the Modular Managed Switch System With Firmware Version 4 50 11 2006 Designation FL SWITCH MM HSUME Revision 09 Order No 269901 1 This user manual is valid for The Modular Managed Switch System with firmware Version 4 50 from the Factory Line product range The Modular Managed Switch System includes he FL SWITCH MM HS and FL SWITCH MM HS M head stations The FL MXT and FL MXT M extension modules The various FL IF interface modules 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT FL SWITCH MM HS ap PHOENIX CONTACT Please Observe the Following Notes In order to ensure the safe use of the product described we recommend that you read this manual carefully The following notes provide information on how to use this manual User Group of This Manual The use of products described in this manual is oriented exclusively to qualified electricians or persons instructed by them who are familiar with applicable standards and other regulations regarding electrical engineering and in particular the relevant safety concepts Phoenix Contact accepts no liability for erroneous handling or damage to products from Phoenix Contact or thi
99. CS Glass fiber 1300 nm multi mode Glass fiber 1300 nm single mode 11 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 0 dBm 980 1000 um Reduced by 12 dBm 980 1000 um via switch 23 0 dBm 980 1000 um 11 5 dBm 980 1000 um 2 F SMA female connectors on the interface module 100 Mbps 650 nm 100 m HCS fiber with F S 200 230 10 dB km 13 dBm 200 230 um 23 0 dBm 200 230 um 11 5 dBm 200 230 um 2 FL IF 2POF SCRJ D SC RJ female connectors on the interface module 10 100 Mbps 100 Mbps according to PROFINET standard 660 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 1m 50 m polymer fiber with F K 980 1000 230 dB km at 10 100 Mbps maximum 100 m HCS fiber with F S 200 230 8 dB km at 100 Mbps maximum 8 0 dBm 980 1000 um 23 0 dBm 980 1000 um 1 0 dBm 980 1000 um 100 m Depends on the interface module 1 m minimum Depends on the interface module 6400 m with glass fiber with F G 50 125 0 7 dB km F1200 2800 m with glass fiber with F G 50 125 1 6 dB km F800 10 000 m with glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 0 7 dB km F1000 3000 m with glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 2 6 dB km F600 36 000 m with glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 36 dB km 32 000 m with glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 4 dB km 26 000 m with glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 5 dB km 6874 en 09 Technical Data and Ordering Data Mechanical Tests Shock test according to IEC 60068 2 27 Operation 25g 11 ms period half sine shock pulse Storage transport 50g 11 ms period h
100. DHCP has been enabled the switch attempts to apply network parameters from a DHCP server The setting regardless of whether DHCP is enabled or not is saved permanently 35 Once DHCP has been enabled the display contains 01 and waits for IP parameters from a DHCP server As long as no IP parameters have been assigned by a DHCP server the switch can still be accessed via the previously set IP parameters Discovery and Configuration Protocol DCP Mode for assigning IP addresses in PROFINET After startup the switch waits for the startup of the IO controller or an engineering tool This status is indicated by display output dP The switch can only be accessed after configuration using the assigned IP address The assigned IP address is not saved permanently which means that the switch waits to be assigned an address every time the device starts DCP is activated automatically if Profinet mode is selected If the MMS has established a PROFINET connection a dot appears in the bottom right corner of the display System Identification Menu This menu is used to display or modify user specific device data e g location device name or function This device data is also available in SNMP System Identification Mame of device fl switch mim hs1 lU Description Modular Managed Switch MMS Physical location Fab 3_011 Contact Admin Oe Enter password Apply Figure 4 16 System Identification menu 6874 e
101. Discards 4 3 5 4 dot1dStatic 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 5 1 dot1dStaticTable 1 dot1dStaticEntry 1 dot1dStaticAddress 2 dot1dStaticReceivePort 3 dot1dStaticAllowedToGoTo 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 59 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 3 6 pBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 4 3 6 1 pBridgeMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 1 1 dot1dExtBase 1 dot1dDeviceCapabilities 2 dot1dTrafficClassesEnabled 2 3 dot1dGmrpStatus 4 dotidCapabilities Table 1 dot1dCapabilitiesEntry 1 dot1dPortCapabilities 2 dot1dPriority 1 dot1dPortPriorityTable 1 dot1dPortPriorityEntry 1 dot1dPortDefaultUserPriority 2 dot1dPortNumTrafficClasses 2 dot1dUserPriorityRegenTable 1 dot1dUserPriorityRegenTable 1 dot1dUserPriority 2 dot1dRegenUserPriority 3 dot1dTrafficClassTable 1 dot1dTrafficClassEntry 1 dot1dTrafficClassPriority 2 dotidTrafficClass 4 dot1 dPortOutboundAccessPriority Table 1 dot1dPortOutboundAccessPriorityEntry 1 dot1dPortOutboundAccessPriority 3 dotidGarp 1 dot1dPortGarpTable 1 dot1dPortGarpEntry 1 dot1dPortGarpJoinTime 2 dotidPortGarpLeaveTime 3 dotidPortGarpLeaveAllTime 4 dotidGmrp 1 dotidPortGmrpTable 1 dot1dPortGmrpEntry 1 dot1dPortGmrpStatus 2 dot1dPortGmrpFailedRegistrations 3 dot1dPortGmrpLastPduOrigin 4 3 6 2 pBridgeConforma
102. E 5 1 FOOL DOM RTT 5 26 KR IB srs e a 4 40 S Save current Copnfguraton 4 21 Saving the Trmmware eee 4 17 Security THOGG nere ege egen 4 31 Set default upon delivery ssssssee 4 21 SMIPDUIN GING metes T D EN 1 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 40 Kl 4 40 SNME IDIGI TI CO uiui eua east exo ee 4 40 SNM POD GGUS iit onte teet i rR 4 40 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIR 4 40 SNMPv2 MIB nen 4 40 Software Updale reote Een 4 17 Source and destination addresses 3 31 Source KEE 4 31 Special IP addresses nonnnnnnnennnennnnennnnnnnennnnnnni 3 4 Standard browsers emos oerte aed 4 11 Starting with faulty software 4 120 States for Status of current configuration 4 21 Static assignment sseeesseseseseeeeneeee 4 14 SOD ONS EE 2 12 Store and forward mode saannnannesnnnnennnnennnnenenn 3 31 1p etss cate 5 1 SUICE PAON e Ce co quede doris ee P NETUS 3 33 Structure of the subnet mask 3 5 oubHnet mas Kcu stie edendi deside adele 3 1 Subnet MASKS enne 3 5 oubnetwork router nee eo eee emt de eak 3 5 Supply voltage oie ion O Ai 2 9 Surge voltage undervoltage 3 24 Switch positio te eet s etas cates Bde 3 13 e ter e per nett acento it ote 4 24 System bus firmware eese 3 22 A 4 PHOENIX CONTACT T Tagg EE 3 33
103. E 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts 35 Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a fiber optic path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off Far End Fault Detection indicates that the connection in the direction of the partner is not OK the partner does not indicate a link and therefore at least one fiber within the fiber optic cable is faulty or has not been assembled correctly 3 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 amp FL IF 2FX SC F Es 3 2 4 3 Connecting the SC D Connectors Startup and Functions To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors Figure 3 13 Connecting the SC D connectors 68740020 3 2 4 4 Fiber Optic Connection Between Devices When connecting two fiber optic interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver The SC D SCRJ connectors which are connected using a support are keyed to ensure that the a
104. Enable Link Monitoring Ports 1 8 WWW Ports 9 16 m m m m m m m m Ports 17 24 eaeeeee ee POF SCRJ Diagnostics Ports 1 8 CNR Ports 9 16 m m mj m j Ports 17 24 CRW Enter password D Apply Figure 8 4 PROFINET alarms in WBM 8 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol 9 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Displaying LLDP information LLDP general 6874 en 09 4 3 9 1 Basics The switch supports LLDP according to IEEE 802 1ab and enables topology detection of devices that also have LLDP activated Advantages of using LLDP Improved error location detection mproved device replacement More efficient network configuration The following information is received by neighbors or sent to neighbors as long as LLDP is activated The device sends its own management and connection information to neighboring devices The device receives management and connection information from neighboring devices The information that is collected is presented in a table in WBM The table includes port numbers that are used to connect both devices together as well as the IP address the device name of neighboring devices and the device type The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP according to 802 1ab is used by network devices to learn and maintain the individual neighbor relationships Function A network infrastructure component transmits
105. Enable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 79 FL SWITCH MM HS Description Here you can disable the port Port disabled 1 Port enabled 2 fiWorkNetPortLinkMonitoring OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 8 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable link monitoring message via display and alarm contact for the relevant port Link monitoring enabled 2 Link monitoring disabled 1 fiWorkNetPortModus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 9 Syntax Integer32 0 1024 Access Read and write escription This object can be used to set the transmission mode for the relevant port Auto negotiation 1 10 Mbps half duplex 2 10 Mbps full duplex 3 100 Mbps half duplex 4 100 Mbps full duplex 5 35 Glass fiber FX ports only support operation at 100 Mbps full duplex 5 35 The auto crossing function is only active when auto negotiation is enabled If the transmission speed or transmission mode is set to a fixed value the auto crossing function is disabled fiWorkNetPortS TPEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 10 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object controls the handling of BPDUs if Rapid Spanning Tree is activated Firmware with Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP not activated 1 RSTP activated 2 Firmware with Spanning Tree Protocol STP not activated port is in Fast forwardin
106. Es PHOENIX CONTACT Select the corresponding group in the Select Group list box to modify or delete the port assignment The group members are indicated by activated checkboxes and can be modified if required An action is completed by entering a password and clicking on Apply or Delete Static Multicast Groups vid OO0T group OT DD 5e 00 18 08 vid 0001 group T DO 5e 00 13 21 vid DUD3 group HIT e TT vid OOO grou DH bett af aa T H VLAN ID HE Multicast Group Address o1 00 5e 00 38 46 Ports 1 8 Ir hw i fT i To E Ports 9 16 I T w wT I vw TT i Please enter the MAC address of a multicast group in the format The address of an IP Multicast Group can be an IP address in dotted format in the range from 224 0 0 0 to 238 255 255 255 or a MAC address m the range from OT OU SE OU OD OU un to 01 00 5E E FF FF separated by colons A multicast IP address will be translated into a multicast MAC address automatically Mac Addresses in the range from 0 OO SE S0 OO OU ug to UI OU BE FF FEEF will not be allowed to avoid Input mistakes For limiting the visibility of orofinet devices in the network create a multicast group for profinet dcp identify requests with the mac address 0T 0E CE OD OD OD Logout Apply Delete Figure 6 2 Static Multicast Groups menu select Group In order to check which ports are assigned to which group select one of the
107. HOENIX CONTACT 4 29 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 30 PHOENIX CONTACT Diagnosable POF interface detailed information Porn Number EE Module HS Interface X1 Port Name Part 1 Port state System reserwe exhausted Port system reserve 0 00 dB Port Rx Power 0 00 dm Tx power 309 00 uv Warnings Power low Alarms Power low Back to the Port POF Table Figure 4 37 Diagnostics web page 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 a d Configuration and Diagnostics Ports Port Mirroring Menu Activation deactivation and setting of port mirroring Port mirroring is used to passively read data that is being transmitted via a selected port To do this a measuring instrument PC is connected to the destination port which records the data yet must not itself be activated Port Mirroring source Part 4 Destination Port 7 Mirroring Status C Disable Enable Enter password Apply Figure 4 38 Port Mirroring web page If ports are set with the same value port mirroring will be disabled The source port is set to o Multicast data packets of created multicast groups cannot be mirrored Enter the destination port in the relevant multicast group in order to enable multicast packets to be received at the set destination port The port capacity is calculated according to the set transmission parameters Example A source port is operated at 100 Mbps and reaches a capacity
108. IX CONTACT 3 31 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 32 Es PHOENIX CONTACT The aging time is set using the dot1dTpAging Time MIB object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 2 The available setting range is 10 825 seconds For static configuration an aging time of 300 seconds is recommended 3 3 4 Prioritization The switch supports two priority queues for adjusting the internal packet processing sequence traffic classes according to IEEE 802 1D Data telegrams that are received are assigned to these classes according to their priority which is specified in the VLAN prioritization tag Data packets with values between 0 and 3 in the priority field are low default priority Data packets with values between 4 and 7 in the priority field are high priority and transmitted via the switch In addition the switch enables port based prioritization of data streams 3 3 4 1 VLAN Prioritization Tag The MMS processes incoming data packets with regard to the prioritization information contained in the Ethernet packet VLAN prioritization tag The tag enables the specification of a priority level from O to 7 which the MMS assigns to one of its two internal queues By default upon delivery the packets with priorities from O to 3 are treated as low priority packets whereas packets with priorities from 4 to 7 are high priority Ethernet packets The assignment of priority levels for both internal priority levels of the MMS can be modified
109. J on page 3 9 and onwards 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 25 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 9 4 Connecting the 48 V PoE Supply Voltage Connecting the PoE Supply The connector for the PoE supply is located on the bottom of the interface module Please observe the keying on the connector when inserting it The module has a green LED for each port which indicates the PoE mode The LED is active if the PoE supply and a PD powered device are connected The LED flashes if the module is supplied with less than 48 V Figure 3 16 Connecting the PoE voltage connector 3 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions Connecting the PoE Supply Connect the 48 V PoE supply to terminals 1 and 2 The terminals are bridged within the module The bridges are located between terminals 1 and 3 and between terminals 2 and 4 The bridges can be used to supply voltage to a maximum of three additional PoE interface modules The supply voltage to additional PoE interface modules must be supplied by power supply units Internal bridges in the interface module 687407054 Figure 3 17 Connecting the 48 V PoE supply Table 3 2 Pin assignment of PoE ports Pin Assignment Description Pin Assignment Description RX 48 V DC Data PoE TX 0 V Data PoE TX 0 V Data PoE a one PHOENIX CONTACT 3 27 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 10 FL IF 2POF SCRJ D Hot plugging When inserting and removing interfac
110. L KDHEAVY PSM SET SCRJ DUP 2 HCS PSM HCS KONFTOOL SCRJ PSM LWL HCS RUGGED 200 230 PSM LWL HCSO 200 230 Order No 2832470 2891055 1652295 2 44856 2744571 2 44869 2831044 2832166 2832496 2832506 2832687 2832690 2891165 2891178 2891068 2891071 2832250 2832263 2832276 2832221 2832289 2832292 2832580 2832616 2832629 2708656 1656673 2744319 2313070 2708876 2799885 2799445 PHOENIX CONTACT Pcs Pck 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 11 4 Ordering Data for GL Certified Components GL Certificate No 24 2750 4 HH Products Description Order Designation Order No Pcs Pck Modular Managed Switch head station FL SWITCH MM HS M 2832522 1 Extension module with 4 slots for eight ports FL MXT M 2832535 1 Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for FL IF MEM 2TX D 2832483 1 connection on the bottom and parameterization memory Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in SC format for FL IF 2FX SC D 2832425 1 connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber single mode 100 Mbps in SC format FL IF 2FX SM SC D 2832205 1 for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for FL IF 2TX VS RJ F 2832344 1 connection on the front Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for FL IF 2TX VS RJ D 2832357 1 connection on the bottom HOTLINE Should
111. MaxAge 2 Hello Time for a ring topology corresponds to the maximum number of components with active Spanning Tree CO EX DOJ s AC C St HE DEED EET g T H Els ba DUTOT Inactive link UEBBEBEH Q It H senn Lee Wen e 53 SS ES SS Relevant path for E timer value settings ome BIE ej IE _ ej c ES Ss e eoe 705600106 Figure 5 18 Example 1 for the relevant path 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree Een aas s iss SS SS k a z Ed o e KI he e ci ERES ERE LE LCE Pss BU DUDDOCDN ecd SE E iini D gni nu oo Ww s TII HIE HELLER TORRE ua Sd ee zs DOO 2 enewnww
112. NKMC JODE LNK MODE LNKMODE PLI S d 5 KE 5 SS und ET as zz zz g z SIS e pg KC Relevant path SE d P el EN e NE e for setting the ZI S AREH 3 timer values Meme asa 53 ANE EJ E HIHEHIE Tuus url he e Lea rans H e 705600107 Figure 5 19 Example 2 for the relevant path 5 2 5 10 Reconfiguration Times The reconfiguration time for a Spanning Tree depends on the timer values for MaxAge and Forward Delay The minimum reconfiguration time is 2 x Forward Delay The maximum reconfiguration time is 2 x Forward Delay MaxAge For the values recommended by the IEEE standard the value for ten active STP switches along a path beginning with the root switch is between 30 s and 50 s Switch Over Time Response to Be Expected for RSTP and RSTP With Activated Ring Detection When using RSTP expect switch over times in the range from 100 ms to 2 s When using fast ring detection expect switch over times in the range from 100 ms to 500 ms 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 25 FL SWITCH MM HS Port Roles The root port of a switch connects this switch to the root switch either directly or via another switch designated switch The designated port is the port at a designated switch that is connected to the root port of the next switch No additional switches bridges are connected to edge ports Termination devices are con
113. NTINUE BOOTING PxC MMS systemprompt gt a Downloading firmware image with XMODEM over serial port XMODEM Receive Waiting for Sender 68740025 Figure 4 56 XMODEM ready The switch is now ready for the new firmware In HyperTerminal select Send File from the Transmission menu SS 21 Folder C Y Filename E Firmar sS witch MS xs bin Browse Protocol modem Close Cancel Figure 4 57 Xmodem Send File option 35 Make sure that the protocol is set to Xmodem otherwise the transmission will fail 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 121 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 122 PHOENIX CONTACT Clicking Send starts the file transfer The following screen shows the progress of the file transmission Xmodem file send for FL SWITCH MM HS Sending C CurrentsPhaenis FL S wITCH Mh HS bin Packet Error checking ERE Retnes o Total retries fo Last error File Dk of 19K Elapsed Remaining Throughput Figure 4 58 File transmission with Xmodem File transmission may take a few minutes Do not perform any other actions while the box is open Once the box has closed a message appears in HyperTerminal Enter c to continue with the boot process or trigger a reset using the reset button 6874_en_09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 5 Management via Telnet The Telnet protocol provides the function of a virtual terminal It offers remote access from
114. ODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE 1m c3 1m CH 19 CH ipo im CH im E 19 CH im c3 2E m ZC 298 m 20 m 28 EC 2288 CH 248 m H Bb 2898 m 20 m 20 m 224m m x1 x2 x3 x4 x1 x2 x3 x4 x1 x2 x3 X4 PHCENIX CONTACT FL SWITCH MM HS Ord No 28 32 326 Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 MAC f GE 00A0451BDD Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 68740028 Figure 1 10 Assignment of ports to slots 1 2 Status and Diagnostic Indicators 1 2 1 LEDs on the Head Station and Extension Modules Be Color Status Meaning Green ON Supply voltage 1 in the tolerance range o OFF OFF Supply voltage 1 too low Green ON Supply voltage 2 in the tolerance range Supply voltage 2 too low FAIL ON Alarm contact open i e an error has occurred OFF Alarm contact closed i e an error has not occurred A Link LED is located above the interface module slot for each port LNK Green Link active Link Link inactive A second LED is located above the interface module slot
115. OENIX CONTACT GD Switch number H Output port number IPHCENIX ACT 100 FD CONTACT 33A Fali Thu H aa I EF fg 100 o bl tenien rere EF d 100 o i TRICHODE m IPHCENIX acr 100 ro EN H H wem FD 1 CONTACT De o 2m E B Fu swen MHS n s x 2 x a x Ord No 2832326 ES 32326 EE Fu j H just ooacas1BDD m 00A I we ra Ust ano use aND mi me Ir ust Py hi hA olgeselol Receiver Im Tac WOE eme e 120 ez o ma PI 2 Py La BN INKMODE LNK MODE wwwox iwwor uxwo euer eee oe soe IPHCENIX CT w0 ro n EN em c o PHOENIX 100 FD w Ders o 1mm ca CONTACT gd wo o mc mo CONTACT pira 2m HE 2mm ca 2m ca FL SWITCH MM HS E x FL SWITCH MM HS x Ord Ord No 28 32326 ES E F am
116. Pkts 5 hostTimeOutPkts 6 hostTimelnOctets 7 hostTimeOutOctets 8 hostTimeOutErrors 9 hostTimeOutBroadcastPkts 10 hostTimeOutMulticastPkts hostTopN 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 5 1 hostfopNControlT able 1 hostTopNControlEntry 1 hostTopNControllndex 2 hostTopNHostlNdex 3 hostTopNRateBase 4 hostTopNTimeRemaining 5 hostTopNDuration 6 hostTopNRequestedSize 7 hostTopNGrantedSize 8 hostTopNStartTime 9 hostTopNOwner 10 hostTopNStatus 2 hostTopNTable 1 hostTopNEntry 1 hostTopNReport 2 hostTopNIndex 3 hostTopNAddress 4 hostTopNRate matrix 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 6 1 martrixControlTable 1 matrixControlEntry 1 matrixControllndex 2 matrixControlDataSource 3 matrixControlTableSize 4 matrixControlLastDeleteTime 5 matrixControlOwner 6 matrixControlStatus 2 matrixSDTable 1 matrixSDEntry 1 matrixSDSourceAddress 2 matrixSDDestAddress SS MX PHOENIX CONTACT 4 55 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 matrixSDIndex 4 matrixSDPkts 5 matrixSDOctets 6 matrixSDErrors 3 matrixDSTable 1 matrixDSEntry 1 matrixDSSourceAddress 2 matrixDSDestAddress 3 matrixDSIndex 4 matrixDSPkts 5 matrixDSOctets 6 matrixDSErrors 4 3 4 7 filter 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 7 1 filterTable 1 filterEntry 1 filterlndex 2 filterChannellndex 3 fi
117. STP and STP If a device with STP support is integrated into the network only switch ports that receive STP BPDUs are set to STP mode All other ports that receive RSTP BPDUS remain in RSTP mode 5 2 4 Topology Detection of a Rapid Spanning Tree Network RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree switches continually exchange information about the network topology using special messages BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units In this way the switches learn the current network topology and based on this information make the following decisions Which switch is selected as root switch Which data paths are disabled If a switch is started using the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol it first expects to be the root switch However no data communication is possible during the startup phase until the current network topology has been learned and until the decisions described above have been made Therefore loops which could otherwise occur during the network startup phase because no data path is interrupted are prevented 5 2 4 1 Topology Modification A topology modification can be triggered by the following A Adding a data path A Failure of a data path Adding a Spanning Tree switch Failure of a Spanning Tree switch A topology modification is automatically detected and the network is reconfigured so that another tree is created and all the devices in this tree can be accessed During this process loops do not even occur temp
118. SecurityAccessDescr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 3 Octet string 0 32 Read and write Displays the description of the client that has access rights OID Syntax 4 102 PHOENIX CONTACT fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessRight 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 4 Integer 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Access Read and write Description Displays the access rights of the relevant client Read only access 1 Read write access 2 fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccess TableCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 2 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Specifies the maximum possible number of entries for access to WBM fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 3 1 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here you can specify whether access to WBM is regulated via access rights for individual clients or not if no valid IP address is specified without regulation is set automatically Without regulation 1 With regulation 2 fI WorkFWCtrlSecurityPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 fI WorkFWCtrlSecurityPortTable fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 1 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Displays the index of the entry in the port list flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortLastMacAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 2 Syn
119. Telnet Server Disable 9 Enable Wah Server Disable 9 Enable SNMP Agent Disable 9 Enable The modified adjustments become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Web Pages Redundancy Disable 9 Rapid Spanning Tree Enabling the module Rapid Spanning Tree you get additional web pages to activate the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol and to configure d Setting the redundancy mode to disable the Rapid Spanning Tree configuration wil be restored to the default state and the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol will be deactivated Look for menu tem Switch Station Rapid Spanning T ree Multicast Filtering Disable Enable Enabling the module Multicast Filtering you get additional web pages to modify various multicast adjustments Disabling the multicast web pages has no infivence on the multicast configuration Look for menu tem Switch Station Multicast Virtual LAN Disable Enable Enabling the module Virtual Local Area Networks V LANI you get additional web pages to modify various VAN adjustments Disabling the web pages has no mtfiuence on the VLAN configuration Look for menu tem Switch Station VLAN DHCP Relay Agent Disable 9 Enable By enabling the module OCP Relay Agent you get an additional web page to activate deactivate the DACP relay agent or modify settings of the DAGE relay agent Look for menu tem Switch Station DHCP Relay Agent Web page refresh i
120. Telnet chent 4 123 Tellier pEOIOCOlL ages eee ee tis 4 123 Telnet Ser E 4 123 Telnet terminals dienaa 4 123 Terminal emulation onere rna cans 2 12 Termination devices 4 32 TEEF S IN gt MNT TP 4 7 haer EEN 3 24 TRAMICCIASSES cud dd euo m PR Ci Eben 3 32 3 33 Transmission DOwer 3 13 Trap Contiguratllor o ace eser ied eet 4 16 EE rr RR EE 4 31 TaD TOGGIV Gl m NR 4 16 Trap targetsirecehverg 4 41 TAD Sot E 4 41 Tree SIMU CUTS sarene ae 5 1 Tree structure of the MIB nsennssnosnnonnenrnerrerrrerrnen 4 44 U Unauthorized access attempts 4 24 Unicast addresses nannenannennennennnnnsnrenrsrrenrnrrn 3 32 User Interface EE 4 124 Bette 4 18 User nt rfaees eer Bar lot aet e Palais 4 117 Using the VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 3 10 UJ TINIZALION ee tc NA 4 37 V V 24 RS 232 interface nanannneeannneennnneennenneennne 2 12 Valid IP oarameters 3 2 VEAN TD aiae A E AE 4 39 VLAN priority og 3 32 Vo 08 T G RU45 TIP WEE 3 10 VT100 terminal cccccc cece ecce eee ai 2 12 W las 4 11 Wep Serve a eege 4 11 Web based management 4 11 X XMODEM ready c re dr rene exe reri 4 121 6874 en 09
121. User Interfaces the multicast mechanism is not activated In the WBM menu the Multicast page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled 6 3 Static Multicast Groups Static multicast groups must be created manually on every switch and all ports that are used to contact group members need to be added The advantages of static groups are 1 Easy specification of network paths on which the multicast data traffic of Known groups is limited 2 No querier required see Query on page 6 7 The following marginal conditions must be observed Precise network documentation for path specification is required Possible redundant paths due to Spanning Tree must be taken into account during port assignment PHOENIX CONTACT 6 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Conversion 6 2 PHOENIX CONTACT For network modifications during servicing or expansion the multicast data paths must be restored 6 3 1 Current Multicast Groups Web Page The table on this web page provides an overview of the current multicast groups created on this MMS These include multicast groups that are assigned as a result of IGMP snooping or groups that are statically created Current Multicast Groups VID Group Address Group Membership RET D1 00 5e 00 18 08 Ports 1 8 pmpmwmwempmpmrm Ires D1 00 5e 00 19 21 Potsi8 WrrrrliIi i a D1 00 5e 00 18 2d Ports 1 8 BREE EE EE D1 00 5e 00 a8 a8 Ports 1 8 I ae Ca CC Not
122. VLAN Registration Protocol can be activated in VLAN Tagging mode for dynamic registration of the VLANs at the relevant neighbor The GVRP switch indicates the selected user setting or enables the setting GVRP is used to dynamically create VLANs across several switches If GVRP is set to Disable the switch is transparent for GVRP BPDUs GVRP data packets If GVRP is active the switch sends GVRP BPDUS every ten seconds If the VLAN assignment of a port to a specified VLAN is changed the adjacent switches will be informed of this change within the next 10 seconds When the GVRP is disabled the adjacent switches also remove the dynamically learned ports within the next 10 seconds If GVRP packets are missing the learned group assignments are rejected after approximately 20 seconds If a static VLAN is installed on a switch a port can be added to this VLAN via GVRP The port is listed in the Current VLANs Table However only statically created group members are saved 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 3 FL SWITCH MM HS 7 4 Es PHOENIX CONTACT 7 4 Current VLANs The Current VLANs web page provides an overview of the VLANs currently created In addition refer to the table for the VLAN in which the switch is actually managed see also IP Configuration web page on page 4 14 All static and dynamic VLANs are listed here A distinction is made between tagged T and untagged U group members as well as non members see po
123. a but cannot be diagnosed A Profinet connection was established 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics The Profinet connection was terminated Diagnosable POF module OK on port xy Diagnosable POF module Warning level reached on port xy Diagnosable POF module Critical status on port xy Configuration difference detected Configuration difference detected at slot Configuration difference removed Diagnostics MAC Address Table Menu Here you will find a list of which MAC address has been detected at which switch port and its VLAN ID If no packets are received at a port for a duration longer than the aging time the entry is deleted Export as an Excel worksheet is possible via download Thus an efficient analysis option is available that is especially helpful in larger networks Mac Address Table Mo Mac Address Port 1 DD DO CB 83 50 31 1 You can download the Mac Address Table in a tabulator separated jist Figure 4 46 MAC Address Table web page The Clear button can be used to delete entries in the MAC address table Diagnostics LLDP Menu For information about LLDP please refer to LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 9 1 4 2 3 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Multicast Filtering VLAN For information about Rapid Spanning Tree please refer to Section 5 Rapid Spanning Tree For information about multicast filtering please refer to Section 6 Multicast Fi
124. a floating alarm contact An error is indicated when the contact is opened 67840015 Figure 2 17 Circuit diagram for the alarm contact The indicated error states are configured in web based management or via SNMP For a list of error states that can be configured please refer to Diagnostics Alarm Contact Menu on page 4 36 In the event of non redundant power supply the switch indicates a supply voltage failure 33 by opening the alarm contact This error message can be prevented by connecting the supply voltage to both terminals in parallel as shown in Figure 2 13 or Figure 2 15 for GL or by deactivating redundant power supply monitoring in web based management PHOENIX CONTACT 2 11 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS 2 5 4 V 24 RS 232 Interface for External Management The 6 pos Mini DIN female connector provides a serial interface to connect a local management station It can be used to connect a VT100 terminal or a PC with corresponding terminal emulation to the management interface for an appropriate cable please refer to page 11 6 Set the following transmission parameters V 24 RS 232 interface Bits per second 38400 CTS RTS Data bits 8 RM de ae Parity None 8 Stop bits 1 eg ep rm Flow control None p de E RD TxD Figure 2 18 Transmission parameters and assignment of the V 24 RS 232 interface 2 6 Grounding 35 Grounding protects people and machines against hazardous voltages To avoid these
125. a port specific BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit at the Message Transmit Interval which contains the individual device information to each port in order to distribute topology information The partner connected to the relevant port learns the corresponding port specific neighbors from these BPDUs The information learned from the BPDUS is saved for a defined period of time as the TTL value TTL Time To Live Subsequent receipt of the same BPDUS increases the TTL value again and the information is still saved If the TTL elapses the neighbor information is deleted An MMS manages a maximum of 50 items of neighbor information all other information is ignored If several neighbors are displayed on one switch port then there must be at least another switch hub installed between this switch and the neighbor indicated which LLDP does not support or has not activated PHOENIX CONTACT 9 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Table 9 1 Event table for LLDP Event Activity of the Individual Response of the LLDP Agent Neighboring LLDP Agent Activate LLDP agent or Transmit LLDP BPDUs to Include sender in the list of device startup all ports neighbors Deactivate LLDP agent or Transmit LLDP BPDUS with Delete sender from the list software reset a TTL value of 0 seconds to of neighbors all ports Link up Send port specific LLDP Include sender in the list of BPDUs neighbors Link down Delete all neighbors for this port Timer Message Transmit C
126. a specific computer to other systems in the network e g PCs or MMS Telnet uses TCP IP on the network supports the functions of Layers 5 to 7 and provides bidirectional communication for linking data termination devices with the relevant processes The destination system is generally referred to as the Telnet server while the specific local system is the Telnet client It is only possible to connect a Telnet client and Telnet server The Telnet server appears to the client as a locally connected terminal 4 5 1 Configuring the Telnet Terminal Fora Telnet connection to be established between the PC and the MMS the IP parameters of both devices must be adjusted so that they are in the same subnetwork Establishing the Telnet Connection Connect the PC and the switch to an Ethernet network From the Start menu select the Run option Enter the following command and the IP address of the MMS Click OK to establish the connection with the switch Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it Far au Open telnet 192 168 2 100 Cancel Browse Figure 4 59 Establishing the Telnet connection 4 5 2 Telnet Interface Functions The following functions are available in the Telnet interface Setting IP parameters Selecting the addressing mechanism Resetting to the default settings Activating deactivating the web server the Telnet function and SNMP
127. access 1 not deleted is always transmitted Not deleted 1 Delete 2 fIWorkFWCtrlProfinet fIWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarm fI WorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortTable fIWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 fIWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortlndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 105 FL SWITCH MM HS Description Displays the port number fiWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortLinkMonitoring OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description In PROFINET mode a slot can send an alarm if the link status changes from Connected to Not connected Do not send alarm 1 Send alarm 2 f iWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortPofScrjDiag OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description In PROFINET mode a slot can send an alarm if the transmission power of a POF SCRJ port reaches a critical value or the port enters a critical state Do not send alarm 1 Send alarm 2 fiWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPowerSupply OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 10 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description In PROFINET mode the switch can send an alarm if one of the redundant power supplies fails Do not send alarm 1 Send alarm 2 fiWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmModuleRemove OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 11 Syntax Integer Access Read and writ
128. address translation group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains information about the address assignment 3 at 1 atTable 1 atEntry 1 atlflndex 2 atPhysAddress 3 atNetAddress 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 47 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 3 3 4 Internet Protocol Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 The Internet protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains information concerning IP switching 4 P 1 ipForwarding 2 ipDefaultT TL 3 iplnReceives 4 iplnHdrErrors 5 iplInAddrErrors 6 ipForwDatagrams 7 ipiInUnknownProtos 8 iplnDiscards 9 ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmTimeout ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates 20 ipAddrTable 1 ipAddrEntry 1 ipAdEntAddr 2 ipAdEntlfindex 3 ipAdEntNetMask 4 ipAdEntBcastAddr 5 ipAdEntReasmMaxSize 21 ipRouteTable 1 ipRouteEntry 1 ipRouteDest 2 ipRoutelflndex 3 ipRouteMetric1 4 ipRouteMetric2 5 ipRouteMetric3 6 ipRouteMetric4 7 ipRouteNextHop 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 A M M M M m M M MM M m MM MM M M MM MM TM um c lI lI lI lI lI lI ll 9 ipRouteProto ipRouteAge ipRouteMask ipRouteMetric5 13 ipRoutelnfo 22 ipNetToMediaTable 1 ipNetToMediaEntry
129. ailable from VLAN 1 This means that in order to access the management interfaces you must either implement data traffic in tagged mode without VLAN tag where the switch is accessed via ports using the VLAN ID or you must use data traffic with VLAN tag the ID of which is 1 Static VLANs 0003 BUT 0005 EI Select VLAN 0007 BU 3 VLAN ID bk Qupto4094 VLAN Name Bu2 Potst8 FF UUTTT PF toggle al PotstiB F U UT T toggle all T Tageed U Untageed F Forbidden MNone Enter password Apply Delete Figure 7 3 Static VLANs menu On this web page you can create static VLANs by assigning a VLAN ID and VLAN name The ports are then assigned to the individual VLANs by selecting the relevant VLAN and clicking on the character in the Ports 1 8 line that indicates the current port status Various options are selected by clicking on the status several times By clicking on toggle all all available ports in the relevant port group change their status The possible states are T Tagged Ports with Tagged status belong to the selected VLAN and packets are sent to this port with VLAN tag U Untagged Ports with Untagged status belong to the selected VLAN and packets are sent to this port without VLAN tag An Untagged port cannot belong to multiple VLANs otherwise there is no logical division except VLAN1 F Forbidden 6874_en_09 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 5 FL SWITCH MM HS 7 6
130. alf sine shock pulse Vibration resistance according to IEC 60068 2 6 Operation storage transport 5g 10 150 Hz Criterion 3 Free fall according to IEC 60068 2 32 1m Conformance With EMC Directives Noise emission according to EN 55011 Class A Warning The limit values of the electromagnetic noise emission according to EN 55011 Class A are only observed by the module if itis installed in a grounded metal control cabinet Radio interference field strengths according to EN 55022 Class A Electrostatic discharge ESD according to EN 61000 4 2 Class 3 Criterion B Electromagnetic fields according to IEC 61000 4 3 10 V m Criterion A Conducted interference according to IEC 61000 4 6 10 Vrms Criterion A Fast transients burst according to IEC 61000 4 4 Data lines 1 kV Criterion A Power supply lines 2 2 kV Criterion B Surge voltages according to IEC 61000 4 5 Data lines 1 kV asymmetrical Criterion B Power supply lines 0 5 kV symmetrical asymmetrical Criterion B Differences Between This Version and Previous Versions Version 01 Spanning Tree section added FL IF 2FX SM added Version 02 Technical data for POF interface added Version 03 Multicast filtering added data for interface modules revised Version 04 Extended multicast filtering added improved handling described for the memory module Version 05 VLAN and RSTP added as well as new interface modules and GL certification Version 06 Supplement for Environmental C
131. all IP parameters to the settings default upon delivery see Section 3 1 1 on page 3 1 35 Resetting to the default settings also resets the password to private For security reasons we recommend you enter a new unique password 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 125 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 126 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree 5 Rapid Spanning Tree 5 1 General Function Loops The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a standardized method IEEE 802 802 1w IEEE 802 1d that enables the use of Ethernet networks with redundant data paths Ethernet networks with redundant data paths form a meshed topology with impermissible loops Due to these loops data packets can circulate endlessly within the network and can also be duplicated As a consequence the network is usually overloaded due to circulating data packets and thus communication is interrupted The meshed structure is thus replaced by a logical deterministic path with a tree structure without loops using the Spanning Tree algorithm In the event of data path failure some of the previously disconnected connections are reconnected to ensure uninterrupted network operation IEEE 802 1w The Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a standardized method IEEE 802 1w that enables the use of Ethernet networks with redundant data paths and prevents the long timer controlled switch over times of STP Usually the formal term Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning
132. an be entered in the Priority field The value will be rounded automatically to the next multiple of 4096 Once you have confirmed the modification by entering your password the initialization mechanism is started Redundant connections can now be created 5 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree R STP Configuration Rapid Spanning Tree Status Disable Enable Large Tree Support 9 Disable O Enabla Fast Ring Detection Disable Enable Bridge Priority 3e db 0 up ta 61440 in steps of 4096 This bridge uses the following parameter if this bridge is the root bridge Maximum Age of STP Information HL Hello Time s 1s up to 10s Farward Delay s ds up to 30s Enter password Ir Apply Figure 5 4 R STP Configuration Large Tree Support If RSTP is operated using the default values it is suitable for up to seven switches along the relevant path see Figure 5 18 on page 5 24 and Figure 5 19 on page 5 25 as an example for the relevant path The RSTP protocol would therefore be possible in a ring topology for up to 15 switches The Large Tree Support option makes the ring topology suitable for 28 switches along the relevant path if RSTP is used The large tree support option could provide an RSTP ring topology with up to 57 devices When using large tree support please note the following Inthe large tree support RSTP topology do not use devices that do not support large tree support Ena
133. ant port Fault monitoring enabled 2 Fault monitoring disabled 1 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 83 FL SWITCH MM HS flWorkNetPofScrjlfGroup OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 Description Generates a table with a detailed description of the POF SCRJ port properties fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlflndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Specifies the port number of the selected port fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfStatus OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 2 Integer Read Indicates the status of the port in relation to the POF SCRJ function The hardware does not support POF SCRJ diagnostics No POF SCRYJU interface module at this port The system reserve at this port is greater than 2 dB The system reserve is less than 2 dB but greater than 0 dB No system reserve available the received optical power is below the required minimum value 5 AOUN OID Syntax Access Description fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfSupplyVoltage 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 4 Integer32 0 65 Read This object provides the current supply voltage of the transceiver at this port in 0 1 V increments possible range 0 V to 6 5 V OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 84 PHOENIX CONTACT flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf TX Power fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPower f
134. asy to operate F SMA connectors with quick mounting connection from Phoenix Contact The connectors are secured on the interface module by manually tightening the screw collar 68740017 Figure 3 8 Connecting the F SMA connectors 3 2 2 4 POF Connection Between Devices When connecting two POF interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics 35 The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver RX RX 50 m 164 04 ft RX maximum 50 TX TX TX RX RX RX o TX 50 m 164 04 ft TX TX maximum o pop gt a ep 68740046 ep Figure 3 9 POF connection 3 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 2 2 5 Reducing the Transmission Power In polymer fiber optic paths POF 20 m the transmission power must be reduced Slide the switch on the top of the interface module to the OFF position Note the assignment of port numbers The switch position can be read in WBM or via SNMP qp 68740019 Figure 3 10 Assignment of F SMA ports to the DIP switch 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 13 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 3 FL IF 2HCS 100 Hot plugging 33 When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The inter
135. ata transmission due to large volumes of low priority data traffic Low priority traffic is rejected when the memory or data channel is overloaded 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 33 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 34 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 Configuration and Diagnostics 6874 en 09 Es The modular managed switch system offers several user interfaces for accessing configuration and diagnostic data The preferred interfaces are the web interface and SNMP interface These two interfaces can be used to make all the necessary settings and request all information Access via Telnet V 24 RS 232 interface only enables access to basic information However the V 24 RS 232 interface also enables firmware update via XMODEM in the event of faulty firmware Settings are not automatically saved permanently The active configuration can be saved permanently by selecting Save current configuration on the Configuration Management web page 4 1 Factory Manager 4 1 1 General Function The integration of the MMS in the Factory Manager provides optimum support for configuration and management 4 1 2 Assigning IP Parameters Only one of several options for assigning IP parameters using Factory Manager 2 2 is described here Once you have established all the necessary connections and Factory Manager has been started start the MMS or execute a reset Following the boot phase the MMS sends the BootP requests
136. ated The message appears for approximately ten seconds on the display after a restart or after interface modules have been inserted or removed The interface module can be used in unmanaged mode The points under Remedy are recommendations they do not all have to be carried out 33 for every error 35 For all other message codes that are not listed here please contact Phoenix Contact 1 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Assembly and Installation 2 Assembly and Installation 2 1 Assembly and Removal of the Head Station Always switch off the supply voltage when assembling removing the head station and extension modules Mount the head station on a clean DIN rail according to DIN EN 50 022 e g NS 35 from Phoenix Contact To avoid contact resistance only use clean corrosion free DIN rails Before mounting the modules an end clamp E NS 35N Order No 08 00 88 6 should be mounted on the left hand side next to the head station to stop the modules from slipping on the DIN rail The supplied ATP ST TWIN side cover see A in Figure 2 4 and the end clamp should only be mounted on the right hand side once the last extension module has been mounted Assembly 1 Place the module onto the DIN rail from above A The upper holding keyway must be hooked onto the top edge of the DIN rail Push the module from the front towards the mounting surface B Figure 2 1 Snapping the head station onto the DIN rail 2 Once the m
137. ategory 1 added Version 07 8 Functions and new features of firmware Version 4 0 and interface modules extended Version 09 Functions and new features of firmware Version 4 50 interface modules and accessories extended 11 2 Typical MMS Current Consumption Example Typical Module Current Consumption FL SWITCH MM HS 1 350 mA FL MXT 2 250 mA FL IF 2TX VS RJ 3 0 mA FL IF 2HCS 100 4 100 mA FL IF 2FX SM SC or ST 5 200 mA FL IF TX POF 10 100 6 60 mA FL IF TX HCS 100 7 60 mA FL IF MEM 8 0 mA FL IF 2PSE 30 mA from MMS additional 850 mA maximum from external 48 V PoE supply FL IF 2POF SCRJ D 200 mA 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 11 5 FL SWITCH MM HS Typical Module Current Consumption Continued Example Structures Station with 2 FX modules and 2 TX modules 350 mA 1 2 x 200 mA 5 2 x 0 mA 3 750 mA Station with 2 FX modules 5 HCS modules and 1 POF TX module 350 mA 1 250 mA 2 2 x 200 mA 5 5 x 100 mA 4 60 mA 6 1560 mA Station with 5 FX modules 4 HCS modules 2 TX modules and 1 POF TX module 350 mA 1 2 x 250 mA 2 5 x 200 mA 5 4 x 100 mA 4 2 x 0 mA 3 60 mA 6 2310 mA 11 3 Ordering Data Products Description Modular Managed Switch head station Extension module with four slots for eight ports Configuration cable for connecting the switch with a PC V 24 RS 232 Universal end clamp Interface module with 2
138. ation FL SWITCH MM HS FL MXT PRG CAB MINI DIN E NS 35 N FL IF 2TX VS RJ F FL IF 2TX VS RJ D FL IF 2FX SC F FL IF 2FX SC D FL IF 2FX ST D FL IF 2FX SM SC D F FL IF TX POF 10 100 D FL IF TX HCS 100 D FL IF MEM 2TX D FL IF 2POF 10 100 D FL IF 2HCS 100 D FL IF 2PSE F FL IF 2POF SCRJ D Order No 2832328 2832331 2730611 080088 6 2832344 2832357 2832412 2832425 2884033 2832205 2832807 2832739 2832483 2832852 2832742 2832904 2891084 Pcs Pck 6874 en 09 Accessories Description Converter board which extends the FL IF TX POF 100 interface module for use as a stand alone media converter Labeling field for labeling the ports of the head station and extension modules RJ45 connector with additional latching Gray RJ45 connector set for linear cable Green RJ45 connector set for crossed cable Assembly tool for RJ45 connector Factory Manager startup diagnostic software Network monitoring with HMI SCADA systems Patchbox 8 x RJ45 CAT 5e pre assembled can be retrofitted Patchbox 6 x RJ45 CAT 5e and 4 SC RJ glass pre assembled can be retrofitted Patch angle with two RJ45 network connections CAT5e including Layer 1 security elements Patch angle with eight RJ45 network connections CAT5e including Layer 1 security elements Patch angle with two RJ45 network connections CAT5e Patch angle with eight RJ45 network connections CAT5e Patch angle with two RJ45 network connecti
139. ax Integer32 Access Read Description Displays the port number fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 2 Syntax MAC address Access Read and write Description Displays the authorized MAC addresses for this port fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 3 4 104 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Syntax Octet string 0 16 Access Read and write Description Displays the user description of the MAC address fI WorkFWCtrlSecurityPort fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortTableCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 3 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Specifies the maximum possible number of entries in the security port table flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacTableCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 4 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Displays the maximum number of authorized MAC addresses per port f iWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 5 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Indicates whether the safety mechanism for this port is active If no valid MAC address has been defined the mechanism is deactivated Mechanism deactivated 1 Mechanism activated 2 fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortlllegalAddrCounterClear OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 6 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Deletes all counters for unauthorized addresses During read
140. be mirrored to another port destination port No port mirroring 0 flSwitchPortMirrStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 3 Integer Read and write This object can be used to enable disable port mirroring No port mirroring 1 Port mirroring enabled 2 33 Port mirroring is disabled if one or both of the flSwitchPortMirrDestinationPort and flSwitchPortMirrSourcePort objects contains the value 0 or if they contain the same value e g both set to 2 flSwitchlgmp 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 flSwitchlgmpSnoop 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 flSwitchlgmpSnoopEnable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 1 Integer Read and write Here the IGMP snooping function can be activated Deactivated 1 Activated 2 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flSwitchlgmpSnoopAging 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 3 Integer 30 3600 Read and write Here the duration of the timeout period for the multicast groups dynamically learned via IGMP can be entered in seconds flSwitchlgmpSnoopTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 4 flSwitchlgmpSnoopEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 4 1 flSwitchlgmpSnoopEgressPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 4 1 1 PortList Read This object displays the ports that forward multicast data due to IGMP snooping flSwi
141. be used to extend the head station from eight ports to 16 ports and the use of two extension modules gives a maximum of 24 ports The desired transmission medium can be freely selected using the various interface modules Figure 1 1 The Modular Managed Switch System Future Proof Networks for the Highest Possible Requirements 10 100 Mbps polymer HCS fibers Easy to assemble polymer fibers can now also be used for Ethernet This cost effective fiber optic technology can cover distances of up to 50 m This provides cost savings both during installation and for maintenance when replacing mechanically damaged fiber optic cables HCS fiber technology is available for distances of up to 100 m PHOENIX CONTACT 1 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Maximum availability All information Port mirroring Modularity 1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT Maximum network availability A device design that does not use a fan the redundant power supply and conformance with all relevant industrial standards in terms of EMC climate mechanical load etc ensure the highest possible level of availability Redundancy can also be created with standards the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ensures the safe operation of the entire network regardless of topology even in the event of a cable interrupt Clear Information You can label your device clearly using the large labeling field and read operating states and additional information from the two digit 7 segment display Two
142. ble 1 dotiqPortVLANStatisticsEntry 1 dot qTpVLANPortInFrames 2 dot qTpVLANPortOutFrames 3 dot1qTpVLANPortInDiscards 4 5 E 4 dot1qTpVLANPortInOverflowFrames 5 dot1qTpVLANPortOutOverflowFrames 6 dot1qTpVLANPortInOverflowDiscards 7 dot1qPortVLANHCStatistics Table dot1qPortVLANHCStatisticsEntry dot1qPortVLANHCInFrames 2 dot1qPortVLANHCOutFrames 3 dot1qPortVLANHCIn Discards 8 dot1qLearningConstraints Table dot1qLearningConstraintsEntry dot1qConstraintVLAN Ee 1 1 Configuration and Diagnostics 2 dot1qConstraintSet 3 dot1qConstraintT ype 4 dot1qConstraintStatus 9 dot1qConstraintSetDefault 10 dot1qConstraintT ypeDefault 4 3 7 2 qBridgeConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 2 1 qBridgeGroups 1 qBridgeBaseGroup 2 qBridgeFdbUnicastGroup 3 qBridgeFdbMulticastGroup 4 qBridgeServiceRequirementsGroup 5 qBridgeFdbStaticGroup 6 qBridgeVLANGroup 7 qBridgeVLANStaticGroup 8 qBridgePortGroup 9 qBridgeVLANStatisticsGroup 10 qBridgeVLANStatisticsOverflowGroup 11 qBridgeVLANHCStatisticsGroup 12 qBridgeLearningConstraintsGroup 13 qBridgeLearningConstraintDefaultGroup 2 qBridgeCompliances 1 qBridgeCompliance 1 1 1 4 3 7 3 dot1dConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 3 1 dot1dGroups 1 dot1dBaseBridgeGroup 2 dot1BasePortGroup 3 dot1
143. ble Web Server Disable 9 Enable SNMP Agent Disable Enable The moditied adjustments become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Web Pages Redundancy Disable Rapid Spanning Tree Enabling the module Rape Spanning Tree you get additional web pages to activate the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol and to configure it Setting the redundancy mode to disable the Rapid Spanning Tree configuration will De restored to the default state and the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol wil be deactivated Look for menu item Switch Station Rapid Spanning T ree Multicast Filtering C Disable Enable Enabling the module Multicast Filtering you get additional web pages to modify various multicast adjustments Disabling the multicast web pages Das no influence on the multicast configuration look for menu tem Switch Station Multicast Virtual LAN Disable 9 Enable Enabling the module Virtual Local Area Networks V LANI you get additional web pages to modify various VLAN adjustments Disabling the web pages has no influence on the WLAN configuration look for menu tem Switch Station VLAN DHCP Relay Agent Disable Enable By enabling the module DHCP Relay Agent you get an additional web page to activate deactivate the DACP relay agent or modify settings of the DACP relay agent Look for menu item Switch Station DHCP Relay Agent Web page refresh interval 3l s Os up to 3600s
144. ble the large tree support option on all devices f RSTP is to be activated as the redundancy mechanism in an existing network with more than seven switches along the relevant path then the large tree support option must first be enabled on all devices It is recommended that large tree support is not activated in networks with less than seven switches along the relevant path Maximum Age of STP Information The parameter is set by the root switch and used by all switches in the ring The parameter is sent to make sure that each switch in the network has a constant value against which the age of the saved configuration is tested The Maximum Age of STP Information Hello Time and Forward Delay fields have the same meaning as for STP These values are used when this switch becomes a root The values currently used can be found under R STP General Hello Time Specifies the time interval within which the root bridge regularly reports to the other bridges via BPDU PHOENIX CONTACT 5 5 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 6 Forward Delay The forward delay value indicates how long the switch is to wait in order for the port state in STP mode to change from Discarding to Listening and from Listening to Learning 2 x forward delay The Maximum Age of STP Hello Time and Forward Delay parameters are optimized by default upon delivery They should not be modified R STP Port Table R STP Port Table
145. blished 6 tcp 1 tcpRtoAlgorithm 2 tcpRtoMin 3 tcpRtoMax 4 tcpoMaxConn 5 tcpActiveOpens 6 tcpPassiveOpens 7 tcpAttemptFails 8 tcpEstabResets 9 tcpCurrEstab 0 tcplnSegs 1 tcpOutSegs 2 tcpRetransSegs 3 tcpConnTable tepConnEntry 1 tepConnState 2 tepConnLocalAddress 3 tepConnLocalPort 4 tepConnRemAddress 5 tepConnRemPort 14 tcpInErrs 15 tcpOutRsts 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 3 7 User Datagram Protocol Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 The User Datagram Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems that implement UDP 7 udp 1 2 3 4 5 1 udplnDatagrams udpNoPorts udpInErrors udpOutDatagrams udp Table udpEntry 1 udpLocalAddress 2 udpLocalPort eS T Te UN 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 3 3 8 egp Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 8 8 egp 1 2 3 1 egplnMsgs 4 egplnErrors egpOutMsgs egpOutErrors egpNeighTable egpNeighEntry 0 egpNeighState 5 1 N Fr Te a 4 3 3 9 Transmission Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 10 transmission 4 3 3 10 Simple Network Management Protocol Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 The Simple Network Management Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems In SNMP devices which are optimized to support either a single agent or a single management station some of th
146. d using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Resetting to the Default Settings Reset Switch Warning Warning Resetting the switch will cause all connectivity to the switch to be lost until the switch has rebooted If you select reset to factory default all configuration information will be reset to its factory default settings Confirm Reset No gt PREV MENU APPLY Push Space Bar to select yes and reset the switch 68740012 Figure 4 53 Resetting to the default settings This screen can be used to reset the switch to the settings default upon delivery or to restart it This screen can be opened by first setting the Reset Switch option or the Reset Switch to factory defaults option in the Basic Switch Configuration screen and then selecting Apply or Save This undoes any changes to the configuration and resets all IP parameters to the settings default upon delivery see Section 3 1 1 on page 3 1 Resetting to the default settings also resets the password to private For security reasons we recommend you enter a new unique password PHOENIX CONTACT 4 119 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 4 3 Starting With Faulty Software Firmware If the software firmware installed on the MMS is faulty you can restore or update the firmware using an update Observe the 7 segme
147. dStpBridgeGroup 4 dot1dStpPortGroup2 5 dot1dStpPortGroup3 6 dot1dTpBridgeGroup 7 dotidTpSdbGroup 8 dot dTpGroup 9 dot1dStaticGroup 10 dot1dNotificationGroup 2 dot1dCompliances 1 BridgeCompliances1493 2 BridgeCompliances4 188 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 63 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 3 8 rstp MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 4 3 8 1 rstp Conformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 1 rstp Groups 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 1 1 1 rstpBridgeGroups 2 rstpDefaultPathCostGroup 3 rstpPortGroup rstp Compliance Groups 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 1 2 1 rstpCompliance 4 3 9 IANAifType MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 30 The IANAifType MIB defines the ifTable in MIB Il See Interface Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 on page 4 47 4 3 10 IF MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 4 3 10 1 ifMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 ifXTable 1 ifXEntry 1 ifName 2 iflnMulticastPkts 3 iflnBroadcastPkts 4 ifOutMulticastPkts 5 ifOutBroadcastPkts 6 ifHCInOctets 7 ifHCInUcastPkts 8 ifHCInMulticastPkts 9 ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable ifHighSpeed ifPromiscuousMode ifConnectorPresent ifAlias 9 ifCounterDiscontinuity Time 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 zd 2 ifStackTable
148. dangers correct installation taking the local conditions into account is vital All Factory Line devices must be grounded so that any possible interference is shielded from the data telegram and discharged to ground potential A wire of at least 2 5 mm must be used for grounding When mounting on a DIN rail the DIN rail must be connected with protective earth ground using grounding terminal blocks The module is connected to protective earth ground via the metal header LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE PHCENIX Aer dob gn i im im C c CONTACT NIZ 288 L7 es 288 CH 28H CH FL SWITCH MM HS J MODE em X P 0 X ww Ord No 28 32326 EM QD Ote PE hum D m Paus O EE Address 00A0451BDD PS US2 Q mH Fail O O US1 GND US2 GND R1 R2 ris O M 6 9 68740008 Figure 2 19 Switch on a grounded DIN rail 2 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 Startup and Functions 3 1 Basic Settings The basic Ethernet functions do not have to be configured and are available when the 33 supply voltage is switched on 3 1 1 Default Upon Delivery Default Settings By default upon delivery or after the system is reset to the default settings the following functions and properties ar
149. data packet received at the relevant port If a data packet is to be sent from the termination device port to the termination device the switch removes the VLAN tag first 7 6 VLAN and R STP When using R STP and VLAN simultaneously please note the following R STP is not based on VLANs R STP creates a loop free topology in the form of a tree structure In the event of static VLAN configuration all possible redundant data paths must be taken into consideration in the configuration All possible backbone ports of the network not the termination device ports must be inserted in all available VLANs as tagged members This ensures that for every possible tree structure that can be generated by R STP every VLAN can be accessed by every switch A typical configuration is illustrated in the following diagram 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 9 FL SWITCH MM HS Termination device in VLAN2 7 10 PHOENIX CONTACT me 2 T es ees ma EI Ir sl kl mm Q wm ono S Sees mung 90000000 D ao NG E BEER ETE Figure 7 7 Manual configuration o VLAN2 port member Tagged VLAN2 port member Untagged Port VID VLAN2 Typical configuration for VLAN and R STP Termination device in VLAN2 6874 en 09 Operating as a PROFINET D
150. diagnostics Port Table Module Interface Port RE RX system reserve 1 System reserve system Reserve is Y details exhausted 0 00 dB 2 System reserve system Reserve is details exhausted 0 00 dB HS 3 System reserve system Reserve is details exhausted 0 00 dB 4 system reserve system Reserve is details exhausted 0 00 dB Mo diagnosable 5 POF module details plugged on this part Mo diagnosable 6 POF module details plugged on this part a A OO AAA 1 A2 A3 Hil Figure 4 36 POF SCRYU transceiver diagnostics Port Table web page The following states can be displayed under Transceiver status System Hardware does not support diagnosable POF modules this hardware does not support POF SCRJ diagnostics No POF SCRJ Interface modules present no POF SCRJ module is plugged in POF SCRJ Interface module is present and OK the system reserve is greater than 2 dB and is displayed under RX system reserve POF SCRJ Interface module is present but the system reserve is low the system reserve is less than 2 dB but greater than O dB POF SCRJU Interface module is present but the system reserve is exhausted no system reserve available the received optical power is below the required minimum value When you click on details under the port number detailed information about the transmit receive properties of the relevant port are displayed in the following window P
151. dicators Function switch for LEDs Diagnostic display LNK MODE Hardware Version 2 2 includes system bus Version 3 1 Hardware Version 2 2 includes system bus Version 3 1 Hardware Version 4 includes system bus Version 4 0 Hardware Version 4 includes system bus Version 4 0 Connection for extension module outgoing system FL SWITCr HS Reset Ord No 28 32 32v button Re BEUS1 Labeling md field E 0040451 BDD MAC address Supply voltage Alarm Mini DIN Slots for interface connection contact V 24 RS 232 modules Figure 1 4 Front view of the head station 1 6 PHOENIX CONTACT interface A 67960010 Modular Managed Switch System Diagnostic status indicators Important information is displayed directly on the device Each port has two LEDs The left hand LED always indicates the LINK while the right hand LED display is set with the function switch Function switch for LEDs The MODE function switch can be used to specify which information is displayed by the second port specific LED The three LEDs above the switch indicate the selected mode This information is then displayed by all port specific LEDs see also example on page 1 13 Connection for extension module FL MXT Connect the first of a maximum of two
152. e Description In PROFINET mode the switch can send an alarm if one of the interface modules is removed Do not send alarm 1 Send alarm 2 4 106 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 flSwitch 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 flSwitchCtrl 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 flSwitchCtrlSpanTree 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 1 Integer Read and write Activates deactivates STP for the switch STP deactivated STP activated 1 Configuration and Diagnostics 33 To enable STP activation the flSwitchCtrlRedundancy object must be set to STP flSwitchCtriRedundancy 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 2 Integer Read and write Displays the selected redundancy mechanisms for the switch If No redundancy is selected all redundancy mechanisms and the corresponding web pages are disabled If RSTP is activated the web pages for RSTP are enabled No redundancy RSTP activated 1 2 35 For STP configuration the Bridge MIB is used see page 4 59 flSwitchCtrlMulticast 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 3 Integer Read and write Indicates whether the web pages required for multicast operation are displayed Hide web pages Show web pages 1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 107 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Acce
153. e This web page will be refreshed in 15 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Sermices Figure 6 1 Current Multicast Groups web page These checkboxes indicate which port has been assigned to each individual group Please note that all multicast groups that are known to the switch including the dynamically detected groups that have not been created manually are shown on this web page The overview for group membership is based on the dot1qTpGroupTable SNMP group This table contains all groups static entries and IGMP and their members 6 3 2 Creating Static Multicast Groups This web page is used to create and manage statically configured multicast groups In order to create a multicast group enter the MAC address provided see Multicast Addresses on page 6 4 for the multicast group in the Multicast Group Address field add the ports of the data paths to the group members and confirm these entries by entering a valid password If a group address is entered as an IP address the IP address is converted into a multicast MAC address according to the specifications of IEEE 802 1 D p Overwriting a dynamic group with a static configuration means that a new port assignment for this group cannot be created dynamically Only deleting this group will enable port assignment for this group to be started dynamically The guidelines for converting multicast IP addresses into a multicast MAC address results in the map
154. e available The password is private All IP parameters are deleted The switch has no valid IP parameters IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 A BootP is activated as the addressing mechanism A All available ports are activated with the following parameters Auto negotiation 100 Mbps full duplex for FX glass fiber modules and HCS ports A All counters of the SNMP agent are deleted The web and Telnet server SNMP agent and V 24 RS 232 interface are active Port mirroring Rapid Spanning Tree access control for web interface port security multicast filtering VLAN DHCP relay agent option 82 and LLDP are deactivated Port security is deactivated for all ports Access control for WBM is deactivated The alarm contact only opens in the event of non redundant power supply and a detected PoE error The transmission of SNMP traps is deactivated and the switch has no valid trap destination IP address The aging time is set to 40 seconds The switch is in Default mode The WBM refresh interval is set to 30 seconds Management is in VLAN 1 The aging time is set using the dot1dTpAging Time MIB object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 2 The available setting range is 10 825 seconds For static configuration an aging time of 300 seconds is recommended During switch restart the active configuration including IP parameters is written
155. e before inserting or removing extension modules FL MXT Do not connect more than two extension modules FL MXT to one head station PHOENIX CONTACT 1 3 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS Extension module FL MXT Es FL MXT M Interface modules FL IF Converter board FL CB IF 1 4 PHOENIX CONTACT An extension module provides another 8 ports which can be individually equipped with interface modules A maximum of 2 extension modules can be connected to the head station The maximum system configuration therefore comprises 24 ports It is not possible to operate the extension modules without the head station The FL MXT M extension module is approved for shipbuilding and off onshore applications thanks to its certification according to GL Certificate No 2427504 HH Please observe the list of GL certified components on page 11 8 Interface modules provide the desired interface to the network The two outlet directions the various types of media supported and the port density of two ports per interface module provide a high degree of flexibility in terms of the system configuration When connected to the FL CB IF converter board the FL IF TX POF interface module can be used as a stand alone media converter Figure 1 3 FL CB IF converter board 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System 1 1 2 Firmware Versions and Their Functions Firmware Version 1 03 provides the standard switch functions
156. e listed objects will be overwritten with the value O 11 snmp i snmplnPkts snmpOutPkts snmplnBadVersions snmplnBadCommunityName snmplnBadCommunityUses snmplnASNParseErrs snmplnTooBigs snmplnNoSuchNames snmpinBadValues snmplnReadOnlys snmplnGenErrs snmplnTotalReqVars snmplInTotalSetVars snmplnGetRequests snmplnGetNexts PHOENIX CONTACT 4 51 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 52 PHOENIX CONTACT snmplnSetRequests snmplnGetResponses 4 3 4 RMON MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 This part of the MIB continuously provides the network management with up to date and historical network component data The configuration of alarms and events controls the evaluation of network component counters Depending on the configuration the result of the evaluation is indicated to the management station by the agents using traps The following groups are supported statistics history alarm hosts hostTopN matrix filter capture and event 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 3 4 1 statistics 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 This MIB group contains information about e g the number of unicast multicast or broadcast telegrams telegram rate and distribution or the number of faulty telegrams classed according to error type The statistics group contains information about the network load and quality 1 etherStatsTable 1 etherStatsEntry 1 etherStatsIndex 2 etherStatsDataSource 3 etherStatsDropEvents 4 etherStatsOctets 5
157. e local port often the root port in this ring 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 5 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 113 FL SWITCH MM HS Syntax Access Description flSwitchRS TPRingStatus OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchRSTPRingFailedPort OID Syntax Access Description OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 114 PHOENIX CONTACT Integer32 Read This object specifies the number of a local port designated port in this ring 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 6 Integer Read This object specifies the status of the RSTP ring Ring closed Ring not closed Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 3 Integer32 Read This object specifies the number of the faulty port in the ring flSwitchRelayAgentDHCP 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpCtrl 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 1 Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the status of the DHCP relay agent DHCP relay agent deactivated 1 DHCP relay agent activated 2 35 If DHCP is activated for the assignment of IP parameters the DHCP relay agent is automatically deactivated flSwitchRelayAgentDhcplpAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 2 IP address Read and write This object can be used to set the IP address of the DHCP server for the DHCP relay agent default 0 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID Syntax Access Descriptio
158. e modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the FL IF 2POF SCRJ interface is removed and another interface type is inserted in its place the ports are set to auto negotiation 3 2 10 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted they are preset with a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps and full duplex mode and link monitoring is not activated for the fiber optic ports If a fiber optic interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been 35 parameterized the existing configuration remains active The data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps The duplex method is set to full duplex If the module is removed auto negotiation is enabled 3 2 10 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts 35 Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a fiber optic path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off Far End Fault Detection indicates that the connection in the direction of the partner is not OK the partner does not indicate a link and therefore at least one fiber within the fiber optic cable is faulty or has not been assembled correc
159. e web based management for the switches e g using the Factory Manager switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate the VLAN function and confirm by entering your password When activating VLAN under User Interfaces the VLAN mechanism is not activated In the WBM menu the VLAN page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled When deactivating the VLAN configuration pages under User Interfaces the VLAN mechanism is not deactivated The saved VLAN configuration is retained 7 2 1 Management VLAN ID The management of the switch is assigned to VLAN 1 by default upon delivery In addition all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default upon delivery This ensures that the network supported management functions can be accessed via all ports Make sure that the MMS is always managed in a VLAN that you can also access PHOENIX CONTACT 7 1 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS Es Es Es Transparent 7 2 PHOENIX CONTACT VLAN ID 1 cannot be deleted and is thus always created on the switch If you delete the VLAN in which the MMS is managed management is automatically switched to VLAN 1 The IGMP Query function only transmits in the management VLAN and only stops if there is a better querier in the management VLAN 7 2 2 Changing the Management VLAN ID 7 2 2 1 Configuration in Transparent Mode 1 In WBM enable the pages for VLAN configuration WBM
160. e with descriptions for components in the Factory Line product group which can be managed by this management unit flComponentsindex OID Syntax Access 4 70 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Description Contains the product index for the component flComponentsName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 2 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the designation of the component flComponentsDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains a brief description of the component flComponentsURL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 4 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the URL of a website with additional information www factoryline de flComponentsOrderNumber OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 5 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the Order No of the component flWorkDevice OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 flWorkBasic OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 flWorkBasicName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 1 Syntax Display string Access Read and write Description Contains the device name corresponds to sysName from MIB2 flWorkBasicDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 2 Syntax Display string Access Read and write Description Contains a brief description corresponds to sysDescr from MIB2 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4
161. eb Enable gt Switch Operating Mode Prof inet gt Web Interface Enable gt Telnet Interface z lt Disable gt DND Interface z lt Disable gt Reset Ho reset gt LOGOUT APPLY SAUE ush SPACE to Enable Disable SNMP Interface Ceffective after reboot gt Figure 4 61 IP configuration in the user interface 4 124 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics As well as displaying the set MAC address this screen can be used to view or modify the IP parameters In order to set the IP parameters the Static option must be selected for IP Parameter 33 Assignment All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the 33 SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently Resetting to the Default Settings Select Reset in the Basic Switch Configuration screen The type of reset can now be selected Reset Switch Warning Warning Resetting the switch will cause all connectivity to the switch to be lost until the switch has rebooted If you select reset to factory default all configuration information will be reset to its factory default settings Confirm Reset No gt PREV MENU APPLY Push Space Bar to select yes and reset the switch 68740012 Figure 4 62 Resetting to the default settings This screen can be used to reset the switch to the default settings This undoes any changes to the configuration and resets
162. ect the second extension module here Connection for interface modules This is where the various interface modules are inserted and locked in place Slot for first extension module head station Connect this extension module either to a head station or to the first extension module here 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System 1 1 3 3 View of the Interface Modules Example Guide bars Positive latches Connection for head station extension module Labeling groove for Zack marker l Locking screws Ethernet ports front connection Ethernet ports downward connection 68740002 Figure 1 6 View of the interface modules example Connection for extension module head station This connector is used to connect the interface module and the extension module or the head station Guide bars These bars aid installation and hold the interface modules securely in place Positive latches These latches must be pressed in order to remove the interface module previous versions used mounting screws Ethernet ports These are the ports for the various interfaces and connection directions Marking groove for Zackband ZBF Mounting screws to lock the interface modules in place PHOENIX CONTACT 1 9 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS 1 1 4 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for Normal Operation 468 mm 18 425 in 341 mm 13 425 in 214 mm 8
163. ed in the network they determine among themselves which router performs the query function This depends on the IP address as the router with the lowest IP address continues to operate as the querier and all the other routers no longer send query messages If these routers do not receive a new query telegram within a specific period of time they themselves become queriers again If there are no routers in the network a suitably equipped switch can be used for the query function Please note that the MMS only operates as the IGMP querier in the management VLAN A switch which connects a multicast receiver with a router can read and evaluate IGMP information using the IGMP snooping method IGMP snooping translates IP multicast group addresses into multicast MAC addresses so that the IGMP function can also be detected by Layer 2 switches The switch enters the MAC addresses of the multicast receivers which were obtained from the IP addresses by IGMP snooping in its own multicast filter table Thus the switch filters multicast packets of known multicast groups and only forwards packets to those ports to which corresponding multicast receivers are connected IGMP snooping can only be used on Layer 2 if all termination devices send IGMP messages The IP stack of multicast compatible termination devices with applications linked to a multicast address automatically sends the relevant membership reports IGMP snooping operates independently of the Inte
164. eed Maximum network segment expansion RJ45 Interfaces Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Number Connection format Connection medium Cable impedance Transmission speed Maximum network segment expansion Complete configuration support Connection of the PoE supply Nominal value Permissible voltage ranges 11 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 Via interface modules flexible media support 16 24 2 Supply voltage control signals data Mini DIN female connector 24 V DC 100 mA maximum 4 Via interface modules flexible media support 8 Incoming and outgoing system bus interface Supply voltage control signals data 2 8 pos RJ45 female connector on the switch Twisted pair cable with a conductor cross section of 0 14 mm to 0 22 mm 100 Ohm 10 100 Mbps 100 m 2 8 pos RJ45 female connector on the switch Twisted pair cable with a conductor cross section of 0 14 mm to 0 22 mm 100 Ohm 10 100 Mbps 100 m Firmware Version 4 0 or later system bus firmware 5 00 or later in the head station and system bus firmware 4 00 or later in the extension modules 2 maximum Via COMBICON conductor cross section 2 5 mm 48 V DC SELV 44 V DC to 53 V DC 6874 en 09 Technical Data and Ordering Data RJ45 Interfaces Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Continued Test voltage Maximum current consumption on US at 48 V DC Typical power consumption Ethernet Interface SC Multi Mode Number C
165. en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 23 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 9 FL IF 2PSE F Versions lt 4 0 treat the module as a standard RJ45 interface module The module can operate in PoE mode without management and without support from the firmware and hardware system bus see note below No configuration options and no diagnostic data are available connected termination devices are nevertheless supplied with power 35 The PoE interface module is supported by firmware Version 4 0 or later Firmware The use of the PoE interface module requires the application of system bus firmware 5 00 or later in the head station and system bus firmware 4 00 or later in the extension modules If this requirement is not met in the head station or in any extension module then PoE management is not available in the entire system The system bus firmware is displayed on the Device Information General web page PoE management and PoE information are only available if the 48 V supply is connected to the relevant PoE interface module The ports can be used as standard RJ45 ports if there is no connected supply Features of PoE Mode Upto twelve PoE interface modules with a total of 24 ports can be operated at the same time in an MMS Configuration is still possible if the interface module is not plugged in or the 48 V supply is not connected PoE management and PoE information are only available if the interface module is plugged in and t
166. ent of this device In the wlan mode Wan Tagging see web page Switch Station Vian C static Assignment Bootstrap Protocol BootP Type of the IP address C Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assignment DHCP Profinet IO Device with Discovery and Configuration Protocol OCP The settings DoatP and DP become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Enter password Apply Figure 4 15 IP Configuration web page IP Address Assignment 35 While the switch waits for an IP address to be assigned 01 or dP in the display the mode LED selected via the mode button also flashes Static Assignment The switch can be accessed using the set IP address and does not send any kind of requests on the receipt of IP parameters If you modify the IP address and or the other IP parameters via WBM once you click on 33 Apply you will no longer have access via the IP address set in the browser Bootstrap Protocol BootP The switch sends a BootP request after every restart and receives a BootP reply with IP parameters If the BootP reply is disabled the switch starts after the third request with the last IP parameters saved If the switch has no saved IP parameters the switch continues to send BootP requests until it receives a response with a BootP reply 4 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Once
167. er of services that this device offers The value is the sum of several calculations For every layer of the OSI reference model there is a calculation in the form of 2 Lay where L indicates the layer For example A node which primarily executes line routing functions has the value 2 1 4 A node which is a host and provides application services has the value 2 70 2 Tys 75 sysORLastChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 8 TimeTicks Read Indicates the value of the sysUpTime during the last system modification 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics sysORTable OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 9 Syntax TimeTicks Access Read Description This table contains objects sysORIndex sysORID sysORDescr and sysORUpTime 4 3 3 2 Interface Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 The interface group contains information about device interfaces 2 interfaces 1 ifNumber 2 ifTable 1 if Entry 1 iflndex 2 ifDescr 3 ifType 4 ifMtu 5 ifSpeed 6 ifPhysAddress 7 ifAdminStatus 8 ifOperStatus 9 ifLastChange iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards iflnErrors iflnUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards 20 ifOutErrors 21 ifOutQLen 22 ifSpecific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Ed S ET x 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ex 4 3 3 3 Address Translation Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 3 The
168. erentiates between the devices that are connected to the local subnetwork and the devices that are located in other subnetworks Example Device 1 wants to establish a connection with device 2 using the above subnet mask Device 2 has IP address 59 EA 55 32 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 5 FL SWITCH MM HS IP address display for device 2 Hexadecimal notation 59 EA 55 32 Binary notation 0101 1001 1110 1010 0101 0101 0011 0010 The individual subnet mask and the IP address for device 2 are then ANDed bit by bit by the software to determine whether device 2 is located in the local subnetwork ANDing the subnet mask and IP address for device 2 Subnet mask 1111 1111 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000 0000 AND IP address 0101 1001 1110 1010 0101 0101 0011 0010 Result after ANDing 0101 1001 1110 101c 01 0 0000 0000 0000 Sub network After ANDing the software determines that the relevant subnetwork 01 does not correspond to the local subnetwork 11 and the data telegram is forwarded to a subnetwork router 3 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 1 3 Flowchart After a Restart 3 1 3 1 Loading the configuration data System startup Yes Memory module inserted No Valid data Q in memory module Valid data in Flash Load data from head station memory module Load default values Load data from Flash head station Boot process completed No Store data 68740037
169. esnenne 2 3 2 3 Assembly and Removal of Interface Modules nnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnenenennnnneesnnrresenne 2 5 2 4 Assembly and Removal of the FL M LABEL Labeling Field Accessories 2 2 4 1 ASSEMDIV EE 2 7 2 4 2 REMOVAL Ne E E 2 8 2 4 3 Dimensions of the Labeling Field ccccceccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeees 2 8 2 5 Installing the Modular Managed Switch Gvsiem 2 9 2 5 1 Connecting the Supply Voltage to the FL SWITCH MM HS Head Station RE 2 9 2 5 2 Connecting the Supply Voltage to the FL SWITCH MM HS M for GL Certified Operation esseseeseseseseeeneneenne 2 10 2 9 9 signi ro ejr cir 2 11 2 5 4 V 24 RS 232 Interface for External Management 2 12 2 6 GronndiNg EE 2 12 S WE ug Die ING FUNCION cassie ms 3 1 3 1 BASIC SCHINGS EE 3 1 3 1 1 Default Upon Delivery Default Settings cccceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 3 1 2 Assigning IP Parameters as otra tuus toties ule deat een ese 3 2 3 1 3 Flowchart After a Restart eeessseesssseesseeeeennenne nnns 3 7 3 2 Starting Up Interface Modules 3 9 3 2 1 PINE ZX VS RIs ieee fas ead sicot ee audebat et potere biet 3 9 3 2 2 PIER OR MOOG EEN 3 11 3 2 9 FL ESZHOS 190 cae me une cu a s tec eU LU 3 14 3 2 4 ELJE 2EX SC AFL IF EX ONES d treere ioeie a ote 3 16 6874_en_09 PHOENIX CONTACT i FL SWITCH MM HS 4 5 3 2 5 Pl TE HR E EE 3 18 3 2 6 FEIP EXIPOE 10 100 Las eios na eddie Eege 3 19 3
170. ess Counter 4 24 Industrial RJ45 connector nnennnennannnennennnennnenene 3 10 LOGON ONCE EE 4 15 IP Lee Te 3 1 IP address assignment eeeseseesesses 4 14 J JavaScript EE 4 11 L Large tree support 5 5 Last Source MAC Address aannnnnennnnnennenneennnen 4 33 Learning addresses eeeeeeseeeeeeee 3 31 PE Srp LE TE 1 12 Line Monitoring iore du eui ee er tnr and 3 10 EInk monttOFI Tig saec suc ternative Dc ea ta a vos 4 25 6874 en 09 Link test e ii oon aeaaea ei 3 10 Load the last stored configuration 4 22 Loading the configuration data 3 7 LOOJIN SGre in Np maaan 4 117 POC OW ect 4 12 M MAG address cecus nee tac oL Acute d 3 31 MAC Address Table A 4 39 Management Information Base 4 40 4 41 Management via local V 24 RS 232 communication in EAC MER IT NEM ODER EO E 4 116 Management via Telnet sussssssss 4 123 Maximum Age of STP Information 5 5 Memory le e TE UE 4 23 Vll eee cle Sete EAE EAE EE E SUNT OPES 4 40 WB EE 4 40 Mini DIN female connechor 2 12 Mini DIN formal eei EIE em Sale 4 116 Modular structure uso ae cocatatecct e inv a RC Se Ice MP RE cated 1 2 Multi address Tunchon 3 31 Multicast data packets annnannennnennennnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 4 31 Multica
171. eted 3 Unknown 4 flWorkFWCtrlUpdateExecute 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 5 Integer Read and write This object can be used to trigger the firmware update No firmware update 1 Execute firmware update 2 35 After a firmware update a reset is required to activate the new firmware 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics fIWorkFWCtrlRunningUpdate OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 6 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the firmware update Firmware update not started Executing firmware update Firmware update successful Connection error Incorrect file name Error OO Om P Go bi A flWorkFWCtrlAutoUpdate OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to trigger the firmware update with subsequent restart No firmware update 1 Execute firmware update 2 fIWorkFWCtrlConf OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 flWorkFWCtriConfStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 1 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the active device configuration Configuration OK configuration corresponds to the saved configuration 1 Configuration faulty configuration does not correspond to the saved configuration i e after a restart the switch could start with another configuration 2 Configuration saved Saving configuration 4 C2 fI WorkFWCtrlConfSave
172. ets is changed The information about VLAN assignment from a tag that may be contained in the data packet is ignored 6874 en 09 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN Tagging In Tagging mode incoming packets are received according to the specified VLAN rules a VLAN tag is added if required and the packet is then processed by the switch and the management level according to the information in the tag When transmitting Ethernet packets the switch observes the rules for the relevant VLAN or the relevant output port 35 The management VLAN ID specifies in which VLAN the switch can be accessed if it is operating in Tagging VLAN mode General VLAN Configuration Current Tagging Status The switch is in the mode WLAN Transparent VLAN Tagging Transparent C Tagging The moditied adjustments become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Maximal number of VLANs ER Configured VLANs 1 Current GWRP Status The GYEP ts not active GVRP Disable C Enable Enter password Apply Figure 7 1 General VLAN Configuration menu The switch supports a maximum of 32 different VLANs After switching the VLAN mode from Tagging to Transparent or vice versa the active Es Es configuration must be saved and a device reset triggered so that the modification becomes active The current valid state can be read in the Current Tagging Status line GVRP protocol The GVRP protocol GARP
173. evice 8 Operating as a PROFINET Device Switching to PROFINET mode 6874 en 09 The switch is supported as a PROFINET device in PC WorX Version 5 00 26 or later In a PROFINET application the PROFINET IO controller is responsible for starting up the switch This includes assigning the IP parameters comparing the desired actual configuration and archiving alarms sent by the switch In the event that a device is replaced the control system detects the replacement device and starts it up automatically For the control program the switch as a PROFINET IO device provides the link states as a process data item 8 1 Preparing the Switch for PROFINET Mode By default upon delivery the switch operates in Default mode and must be set to PROFINET mode once Two mechanisms are available for switching the mode Following startup and assignment of an IP address the operating mode can be changed on the corresponding page in WBM see Operating Mode Web Page on page 4 20 Through configuration via the serial interface see Management via Local V 24 RS 232 Communication Interface on page 4 116 When activating PROFINET mode the following default settings are made for operation The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is enabled with the following configuration specifications for PROFINET components Message transmit interval 5 s Message transmit hold multiplier 2 TLV port ID with subtype locally assigned in the f
174. extension modules here Slots for interface modules This is where the various interface modules each with two ports are inserted and locked in place Mini DIN V 24 RS 232 V 24 RS 232 interface in Mini DIN format for local configuration via the serial interface A Alarm contact The floating alarm contact can be connected here via a 2 pos COMBICON connector Supply voltage connection The supply voltage can be connected via the 4 pos COMBICON connector redundancy is optional Reset button In order to prevent an accidental MMS reset the reset button must be held down for a 33 few seconds before it triggers a reset Diagnostic display Various operating states or error states can be displayed here For a list of possible codes please refer to page 1 14 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 1 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 1 3 2 Front View of the Extension Module LED diagnostic and status indicators Connection for first extension module head station incoming system interface Connection for second extension module outgoing system interface d Slots for interface modules 67960011 Figure 1 5 Front view of the extension module A Diagnostic status indicators Important information is displayed directly on the device Connection for second extension module Conn
175. face modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 2 9 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted the link monitoring function for the HCS ports is not activated An HCS port is set to 100 Mbps full duplex If an HCS port is removed the port mode 33 is set to auto negotiation 3 2 3 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition an HCS path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 2 3 3 Connecting the F SMA Connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors F SMA is a standardized fiber optic connection We recommend the use of easy to operate F SMA connectors with quick mounting connection from Phoenix Contact The connectors are secured on the interface module by manually tightening the screw collar 68740017 e Figure 3 11 Connecting the F SMA connectors 3 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 2 3 4 HCS Connection Between Devices 35 When connecting two HCS interface modules note the
176. fault Values automatically activates the IP address of the computer on which the Factory Manger is installed as the trap target 4 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Firmware update GER Configuration and Diagnostics Firmware Properties MMS Ea General System Diagnostics Ports Trap T argets Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration Serial Number 4885038 Firmware Version i UU Hardware Revision nem Bootloader Version OO Update LK Cancel Figure 4 8 Firmware menu Here you can view all information about the current device software firmware You can also update the software firmware using the Factory Manager When you click on Update the following window appears which contains information about the firmware used During a firmware update the current status is shown on the MMS display 03 Downloading firmware via the network 04 Saving the firmware in the MMS Flash memory 05 The new firmware has been saved successfully Display goes out bo Device is booting and loading new firmware in the RAM Following a firmware update a reset is executed automatically to activate the new firmware Please make sure that the TFTP Server service program is activated in the toolbar You can monitor the download in the message window 25 50 75 100 Always wait until all the LEDs light up after approximately two minutes and the device is available again after bootin
177. file observe the following Create a point to point connection between a MMS and the management station Load the configuration file on the MMS Reset the MMS Adjust the IP parameters Save the configuration Save current configuration function The duplicated switch can now be operated in the network using the adjusted IP parameters Configuration Management Memory Module Menu This web page provides an overview of the configuration in the memory module and indicates which configuration was used during booting Memory Module The switch got the configuration out of the See Gl ps Cela Tee GI Memory Module during the startup phase Memory Module A Memory Module is present Information about the configuration stored in the Memory Module Configuration Mame MM AS Configuration IF Address contained in the 192 168 2 20 configuration Version of the firmware which 450 has saved the configuration Figure 4 28 Memory Module web page Here you can compare the configuration on the memory module with the configuration in the head station memory The result is displayed in text format In addition the result is displayed in encoded form see also Meaning of the 7 Segment Display on page 1 14 Configuration comparison The configurations in the nan volatile memory of status the Head Station and the memory module are equal Enter password Compare Figure 4 29 Configuration comparison web page If
178. for inputs should be set to 512 ms default The update time for outputs should be set to 512 ms default The monitoring time should be set to 2000 ms default The interface modules must be selected from the module catalog and added to the station FL SWITCH MM HS prn mms l 172 16 27 E TPROFIMET Einstellungen Bezeichnung D Hersteller 8 8 8 E D Produktbezeichnung JL H5 Funktionsbeschreibung Modularer managbarer Switch als Profinet IO D D E MM Di Geratefamie e D Bestelhmmer 1 5283232 CCCs Set by the user D Revision 0 0 0 Lmtam DwsjPROFINET Ger tename fkswikchemmehs amp kofferide 4 Station name D stationsname et Di Temehmemame Lt ES e D Adresse luese anert Ia IP address D Sumetzmaske S Subnet mask D Standardgateway G D Aktualisierungszeit Eing nge Si2ms 4 Recommended value D Aktuaisierungszei Ausg nge Si2ms Jg Recommended value D berwachungszeit ms Lamm 4 Recommended value D Betrieb bei Konfigurationsunterschieden mein Dh Oberster Knoten in Ethernet Topologie Lon D Werbindungszustand protokolieren Ir Figure 8 3 Device details with modified settings 8 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Operating as a PROFINET Device The PROFINET variables can then be created and used in the control program
179. from Phoenix Contact can be found under object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 The MMS MIB contains the following groups pxcModules OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 1 pxcGlobal OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 pxcFactoryLine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 All configuration modifications which are to take effect after an MMS restart must be saved permanently using the flWorkFWCtrlConfSave object The aging time default 40 seconds is not set using the private MIBs instead it is set using the dot1dTpAgingTime MIB object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 2 The available setting range is 10 825 seconds MIB Tree The private MIB from Phoenix Contact is integrated in the MIB tree as follows see red arrow MIB tee Es citt o rg nul ELE iso LES ang GC dod E53 intemet directory EL mami EM S mib 2 E experimental E private EMI enterprises i H E phoenixContact f g pxcModules H E pxcGlobal f g pscFactoryLine 9 snmp Figure 4 49 MIB tree 4 3 11 1 pxcModules OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 1 flMSwitchMModule 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 1 8 The object contains information about the manufacturer 4 3 11 2 pxcGlobal OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 pxcBasic 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 Co
180. g PHOENIX CONTACT 4 7 FL SWITCH MM HS It is not ensured that all existing configuration data will be retained after a firmware update downgrade Therefore please check the configuration settings or return the device to the settings default upon delivery the MMS An update via XMODEM is required see Starting With Faulty Software Firmware on page 4 120 A voltage failure during a firmware update results in the destruction of the firmware on Update Firmware Update MMS Seralnumber 44985039 Actual Firmware Firmware Version f D Hardware Revision nem Bootloader Version f OU Mew Firmware Firmware File Select TFTP Server 0 0 0 0 Change Start Figure 4 9 Update menu In order to enable a firmware update the firmware image must be located in the 33 Download directory of the Factory Manager An application note for firmware update via TFTP AH EN TFTP FIRMWARE UPDATE can be found in the Download Center at www download phoenixcontact com 4 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Options Properties MMS x General System Diagnostics Ports Trap T argets Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration Enable W eb based M anagement Enable Port Mirroring sl Port that is mirrared source Port that serves as mirror target Figure 4 10 Options menu Two functions are available for selection Activate deactivate the
181. g interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 2 1 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated Link monitoring for the twisted pair ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 2 1 2 Functions Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half or full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly PHOENIX CONTACT 3 9 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3
182. g mode 1 STP activated 2 fiWorkNetPortlflndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 11 Syntax Integer32 0 1024 Access Read 4 80 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Description Contains the index of the port according to IEEE 802 3ad fiWorkNetLLWHPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 12 Syntax Integer32 8193 8296 Access Read Description Contains the index of the port according to IEEE 802 3ad but possibly with gaps due to missing ports fiWorkNetPortType OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 13 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description Specifies the medium of this port flWorkNetPortModuleName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 14 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description Specifies the name of the module flWorkNetPortInterfaceName OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 15 Octet string Read Specifies the name of the interface fiWorkNetPortPriorityLevel OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 16 Integer Read and write Selects the priority level for incoming data packets Priority low 1 default Priority high 2 fiWorkNetPortPofTransmittingPower OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 17 Syntax Integer Access Read Description For polymer fiber POF paths lt 20 m the transmission power must be reduced This object can be used to read the switch position on the interface module
183. ger Access Read Description Contains the duplex mode of the selected port Automatic 1 Manual 2 flWorkNetPortName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 6 Syntax Octet string 0 16 Access Read and write Description Contains the name of the port e g Robot 1 flWorkNetPortEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write 4 78 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Specifies the port number of the selected port fiWorkNetPortLinkState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 2 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Indicates the port status Connected 1 Not connected 2 farEndFault 3 fiWorkNetPortSpeed OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 3 Syntax Gauge32 Access Read Description Contains the data transmission rate of the selected port in bps fiWorkNetPortDuplexMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the duplex mode of the selected port No link 0 Full duplex 1 Half duplex 2 fiWorkNetPortNegotiation OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 5 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the duplex mode of the selected port Automatic 1 Manual 2 flWorkNetPortName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 6 Syntax Octet string 0 16 Access Read and write Description Contains the name of the port e g Robot 1 flWorkNetPort
184. he event table Event Table cleared Password has been changed Password has not been changed successfully Configuration has been saved The configuration has been modified the first time after the last storing Memory Module recognized Memory Module removed Memory Module cleared Configuration File Transfer successfully executed Configuration File Transfer was not successfully executed Firmware Update was successfully executed Firmware Update was not successfully executed Link up at port xy Link down at port xy Enabling port xy Disabling port xy Unpermitted mac address at port xy RSTP enabled RSTP disabled RSTP topology changed RSTP elected this switch as new root IGMP Snooping enabled IGMP Snooping disabled IGMP Querier enabled IGMP Querier disabled Better query received Better query received in vlan xy Become active querier Become active querier in vlan xy GVRP enabled GVRP disabled Power Supply US1 lost Power Supply US2 lost Power Supply US1 and US2 are connected now LLDP Agent enabled LLDP Agent disabled LLDP recognized new neighbor at port xy LLDP neighborhood information changed at port xy LLDP neighbor information become obsolete at port xy Power over Ethernet fault detected at least one port No Power over Ethernet faults detected any more One of the interface modules is not supported by the system hardware The interface will be able to send or receive dat
185. here is a connected 48 V supply The following management functions are available Display error states for each port and communicate via the alarm contact yes no Connect disconnect voltage for each port Switch current limitation on or off for loads classified as Class 1 devices Send Traps when the PoE status changes The following diagnostic information is displayed No error Surge voltage undervoltage Thermal error Overload Disconnected load the current consumption at this port is less than 10 mA the supply voltage is disconnected by the PoE module No 48 V supply 3 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions No PoE interface module detected at this port No hardware support due to the system bus Detected class of a connected termination device Class O to Class 4 Output voltage and output current Hot plugging 33 When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 2 9 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated Link monitoring for the twisted pair ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 2 9 2 Functions Auto negotiation Auto negotia
186. iWorkNetPortPofScrjlfSystemReserve 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 6 Integer32 0 6553 Read This object provides the current transmission power of the transceiver at this port in 0 1 uW increments possible range 0 W to 0 006553 W 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 7 Integer32 0 6553 Read This object provides the current receiving power of the transceiver at this port in 0 1 uW increments possible range 0 W to 0 006553 W 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 8 Syntax Integer32 0 255 Access Read Description Provides the remaining system reserve in 0 1 dB increments fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerHighAlarm OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 9 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power high alarm has been triggered Alarm not triggered 1 Alarm triggered 2 fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerLowAlarm OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 10 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power low alarm has been triggered Alarm not triggered 1 Alarm triggered 2 fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerHighWarning OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 11 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power high warning message has been triggered Warning message not triggered 1 Warning message triggered 2 fiWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerLowWarning OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 43
187. ice due to the physical position in the network The DHCP packet broadcast originally sent by the termination device also reaches the DHCP server if it is located in the same subnetwork The DHCP server should be set so that it ignores this packet Sequence Every time the MMS receives a DHCP discover request that has been sent by a termination device the MMS extends the DHCP option 82 field and forwards the data packet to the specific DHCP server The desired DHCP server should be configured in WBM on the Relay Agent page The DHCP server can generate a response using option 82 information and can send this to the relay agent The switch then removes the DHCP option 82 data from the DHCP server response and forwards it to the termination device that triggered the request Information in the DHCP option 82 field The MMS extends the VLAN ID in the DHCP option 82 field for the VLAN to which the termination device is assigned and the switch port to which the termination device is connected In addition the MMS enters its own DHCP option 82 remote ID in the field The DHCP option 82 remote ID can be configured by the user and contains the IP or MAC address of the MMS 10 1 Activating the DHCP Relay Agent Enable the web page via General Configuration User Interfaces Activate the agent with Enable specify at least the IP address of the server The MMS management does not start the relay agent while the switch is operating as a
188. ide range of information about the device itself the set parameters and the operating state can be viewed Modifications can only be made by entering the valid password By default upon delivery the password is private For security reasons we recommend you enter a new unique password 4 2 2 Requirements for the Use of WBM As the web server operates using the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a standard browser can be used Access is via the URL http IP address of the device Example http 172 16 29 112 For full operation of the web pages the browser must support JavaScript 1 2 and cascading style sheets Level 1 We recommend the use of Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 WBM can only be called using a valid IP address By default upon delivery the switch has no valid IP address Settings are not automatically saved permanently If the active configuration has not been saved a flashing floppy disk icon appears in the top right corner in WBM The icon is linked to the Configuration Management web page The active configuration can be saved permanently by selecting Save current configuration on this web page 4 2 2 1 Structure of the Web Pages The web pages are divided into four areas Device type and device logo Device name assigned by the user and loading time to prevent mix ups Navigation tree on the left hand side Information tables which contain current device information during run
189. idge uH Switch P H H a ER adds o Priority Default E t TA SE Ein asa E e ej E am B oam SE BEBE EE E Switch 11 SAN Ia eee OL x E XJ Priority 40000 eit ce Switch 6 DE eee ss E SS Switch 2 Priority Default E P Backup root bridge S j S b Priority 4000 ET E 5 e Switch 10 Priority Default 898 Switch 5 Priority Default DEOR AGE poo ER ER EIS SS Switch 9 d Priority Default AK meg 25 53 ES ES 1 a C z S FS PE PE WHEN SAY Discarding port E E Priority Default NS dd e Switch 7 Priority 40000 667409053 Figure 5 15 Example with fast ring detection The switches in the illustrated example are arranged in such a way that two devices at the central position are configured as the root bridge and as the backup root bridge via the priority The root bridge has the lowest priority the backup root bridge has the second lowest priority The root and the backup root bridge are connected together redundantly The remaining switches are networked in several rings in a ring topology The end points of the ring are implemented on the root bridge and on the backup root bridge The switch furthest away from the root bridge has a low priority as its default setting e g 40000 The advantage of this constellation is that the individual rings are not adversely affected in the event of an error 5 2 5 4 Method of Operation of the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Components of a Spanning Tree Domain
190. igned via WBM before switching to PROFINET mode 8 2 5 Operating in the PROFINET Environment A switch that has already been assigned a name starts in PROFINET mode without an IP address and waits for the assignment of an IP configuration dP in the display and flashing of the LED for the currently active mode Once the project has been translated and downloaded to the control system the control system implements startup and configuration As soon as a communication relationship has been successfully established between the switch and the control system the switch starts its management interface The switch indicates that the PROFINET connection has been established correctly by an entry in the results table and the appearance of an additional dot in the bottom right corner of the display If the MMS has established a PROFINET connection a dot appears in the bottom right corner of the display PHOENIX CONTACT 8 5 FL SWITCH MM HS 8 3 PROFINET Alarms 8 3 1 Alarms in WBM In PROFINET mode the PROFINET Alarms web page appears in the navigation bar under Switch Station Diagnostics Here all alarms supported by the IO device can be activated The PROFINET alarms are sent to the control system by the IO devices From there they can be read from the diagnostics archive using DIAG Version 2 0 is included in Service Pack 1 for PC WorX 5 00 26 Profinet Alarms Power Supply Disable C Enable Module Remove Disable C
191. interface insert a screwdriver in the notch provided and use it to push the modules apart 3 Push the right hand extension module along the DIN rail to the right until the plug in contact is completely free 4 Pull down the holding latches using a suitable tool e g screwdriver 5 Then swivel the bottom of the module away from the DIN rail slightly A Next lift the module upwards away from the DIN rail HD Ba Ro Figure 2 5 Removal of extension modules 2 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 A Assembly and Installation 2 3 Assembly and Removal of Interface Modules Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management Ensure that the surface of the head station or extension module housing is clean Assembly 1 Insert the interface modules in the slots of the basic modules The guide bars on the top of the interface modules must be pushed into the guide slots of the basic module without tilting them Figure 2 6 Assembly of interface modules 2 Now push the interface modules towards the basic module until the connector and the holding clamp are snapped into place 3 Secure the interface module using the screw on the bottom right hand side of the interface module Figure 2 7 Secu
192. itching to R STP mode can only be forced via Force Rstp or via a restart 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 9 FL SWITCH MM HS RSTP Fast Ring Detection The RSTP Fast Ring Detection function can be activated on the RSTP Configuration web page see page 5 5 This function speeds up the switch over to a redundant path in the event of an error and provides easy diagnostics RSTP fast ring detection provides each ring with an ID this ID is made known to each switch in the relevant ring A switch can belong to several different rings at the same time Structure of the Ring ID The ring ID consists of the port number of the blocking port and the MAC address of the corresponding switch Advantages of the ring ID Easier to identify redundant paths and locate blocking ports Possible to check whether the desired topology corresponds to the actual topology RSTP Fast Ring Detection RSTP Fast Ring Detection Status Disable Enable Enter password Apply RSTP Ring Table Local ring ports Blocking port of ring No Status A B Port on Switch Ring ID Figure 5 9 RSTP Ring Table Information in WBM The following information is displayed on the web page and via SNMP Local Ring Ports These two ports of this switch belong to the ring that is listed ring ID Blocking Port This port deliberately breaks the loop Ring detection states The following states can occur for ring detection Not Ready Ring detection ha
193. j Enter password fs Apply Figure 5 6 R STP Port Configuration Table menu An overview of the main settings for each port is provided here 5 2 1 2 R STP Port Configuration Modifications of properties can result in complete reconfiguration of Rapid Spanning Tree It is recommended that a suitable root switch and a backup root switch are specified using corresponding priority assignment This page displays the valid R STP configuration settings for the selected port If termination devices or subnetworks are connected without RSTP or STP via a port it is recommended that the Admin Edge Port be set to Edge Port In this way a link modification at this port does not result in a topology modification 5 2 1 3 Switch Port ID The validity of switches and ports is determined according to priority vectors Bridge Identifier A switch ID consists of 8 bytes as an unsigned integer value When comparing two switch IDs the one with the lowest numeric value is of higher i e better priority The first two bytes contain the priority The last 6 bytes contain the MAC address and thus ensure the uniqueness of the switch ID in the event of identical priority values The switch with the lowest numerical switch ID becomes the root It is recommended that the root port and alternate port are specified using the priority PHOENIX CONTACT 5 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 8 PHOENIX CONTACT Port Identifier The port ID consists of
194. k and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its F SMA ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface 3 2 6 3 Functions of the Twisted Pair Interface Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically PHOENIX CONTACT 3 19 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 20 Es 4 PHOENIX CONTACT Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used a
195. l Properties MMS Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration General System Diagnostics Forts Trap T argets di Description Name lt Jupe FL SWITCH MM HS TEPZIP MAC Address IP Address 192 169 2 3100 oo amp o Jas e fea s Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway U 0 0 0 Figure 4 3 General menu Here you can check or modify device names and types as well as IP parameters 6874_en_09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 3 FL SWITCH MM HS If you modify the IP address and or the other IP parameters using the Factory Manager once you click OK you will no longer have access via the Factory Manager Restarting To activate the new addresses following a restart BootP must be activated in the MMS on the IP Configuration page in WBM the MMS activates the modified parameters and restores access System Properties MMS Ea Firmware Options Extended Options Configuration General System Diagnostics Ports Trap T argets Name of Device Description Modular Managed Swatch MMS Physical Location D B 4 06 Contact Mame admin Uptime 1 4812 05 Senalnumber 44986023 Refresh Conca Figure 4 4 System menu In this menu you can add additional information in the white fields which will be saved on the MMS This information is also available via SNMP and WBM 4 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Diagnostics Properties MMS
196. l l u LLL ELE Lers DELSI henner ini H unn OE TEE EE ET ECO FEES E inn 9 nnn EI Ie Sy ES ES om BESI fe el EIS 3 Inactive link nii HI gni ers E eir ANANIN nm Fal SUNE e Ns TT el KEI g a TET a i Active link LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MOE LNKMODE L
197. lterPktDataOffset 4 filterPktData 5 filterPktDataMask 6 filterPktDataNotMask 7 filterPktStatus 8 filterPktStatusMask 9 filterPktStatusNotMask 0 filterOwner 1 filterStatus N mM M NNN DN m uc zech 2 channelTable 1 channelEntry 1 channellndex 2 channellflndex 3 channelAcceptTime 4 channelDataControl 5 channelTurnOnEventlndex 6 channelTurnOffEventlndex 7 channelEventlndex 9 channelMatches 10 channelDescription 11 channelOwner 8 channelEventStatus 0 1 2 channelStatus 1 1 1 4 56 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 4 3 4 8 capture 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 8 1 bufferControlTable 1 bufferControlEntry 1 bufferControllndex 2 bufferControlChannellndex 3 bufferControlFullStatus 4 bufferControlFullAction 5 bufferControlCaptureSliceSize 6 bufferControlDownloadSliceSize 7 bufferControlDownloadOffset 8 bufferControlMaxOctetsRequested 9 bufferControlMaxOctetsGranted 10 bufferControlCapturedPackets 11 bufferControlTurnOnTime 12 bufferControlOwner 13 bufferControlStatus 2 captureBufferTable 1 captureBufferEntry 1 captureBufferControllndex 2 captureBufferlndex 3 captureBufferPacketlD 4 captureBufferPacketData 5 captureBufferPacketLength 6 7 1 1 12 6 captureBufferPacketTime 7
198. ltering For information about the VLAN function please refer to Section 7 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 39 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 40 Es PHOENIX CONTACT 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 4 3 1 General Function SNMP is a manufacturer independent standard for Ethernet management It defines commands for reading and writing information and defines formats for error and status messages SNMP is also a structured model which comprises agents and their relevant MIB Management Information Base and a manager The manager is a software tool which is executed on a network management station The agents are located inside switches bus terminals routers and other devices that support SNMP The task of the agents is to collect and provide data in the MIB The manager regularly requests and displays this information The devices can be configured by writing data from the manager to the MIB In the event of an emergency the agents can also send messages traps directly to the manager All configuration modifications which are to take effect after an MMS restart must be saved permanently using the flWorkFWCtrlConfSave object SNMP Interface All managed Factory Line components have an SNMP agent This agent of an FL SWITCH MM HS manages Management Information Base ll MIB 2 according to RFC1213 RMON MIB bridge MIB If MIB Etherlike MIB lana address family MIB IANAifType MIB
199. ly in the management VLAN 6874 en 09 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 7 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN VLAN Es Es A 7 1 Basics A VLAN is a closed network which is separated logically functionally rather than physically from the other networks A VLAN creates its own broadcast and multicast domain which is defined by the user according to specified logical criteria VLANs are used to separate the physical and the logical network structure A Data packets are only forwarded within the relevant VLAN The members of a VLAN can be distributed over a large area The reduced propagation of broadcasts and multicasts increases the available bandwidth within a network segment In addition the strict separation of the data traffic increases system security A router or similar Layer 3 device is required for data traffic between VLANs For the switch the VLANs can be created statically or dynamically For dynamic configuration the data frames are equipped with a tag A tag is an extension within a data frame that indicates the VLAN assignment If configured correspondingly this tag can be added or removed again from the last tag during the transmission of the first switch in the transmission chain Several different VLANs can thus use the same switches infrastructure components Alternatively termination devices that support VLAN tags can also be used 7 2 Enabling the VLAN Web Pages in Web Based Management Activat
200. mediately sends the telegram back to the transmitter The correct installation and configuration of the TCP IP software for example can be checked in this way As Layers 1 and 2 of the ISO OSI reference model are not included in the test they should be tested separately using the ping function Value 255 in the Byte Value 255 is defined as a broadcast address The telegram is sent to all the computers that are in the same part of the network Examples 004 255 255 255 198 2 7 255 or 255 255 255 255 all the computers in all the networks If the network is divided into subnetworks the subnet masks must be observed during calculation otherwise some devices may be omitted Simplified The last address of an area is reserved as the broadcast address 6874_en_09 Startup and Functions 0 x x x Addresses Value 0 is the ID of the specific network If the IP address starts with a zero the receiver is in the same network Example 0 2 1 1 refers to device 2 1 1 in this network The zero previously signified the broadcast address If older devices are used unauthorized broadcast and complete overload of the entire network broadcast storm may occur when using the IP address O x x x 3 1 2 4 Subnet Masks Routers and gateways divide large networks into several subnetworks The IP addresses for individual devices are assigned to specific subnetworks by the subnet mask The network part of an IP address is not modified by the subnet mask
201. mode Profinet the following settings will be done m select ip address assignment DOE m enable LELDE m clear fhe default system Name ke TL ARTI MM HS m save fhe configuration m execute a reboot Changing from the mode Profinet io an other mode the following seitimgs will be done independently of the setting before selecting the mode mrofinet m select ip address assignment Boot m replace as empty system Mame by the default Svetem Mame like EL SWITCH MASH The settings become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Enter password Ir Apply Figure 4 22 Operating Mode web page 4 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Configuration Management General Menu This table is used to view all parameters that are required to save the active configuration or load a new configuration and to modify them by entering a valid password It can also be used to restart the system with the relevant configuration Configuration Management The current configuration is equal ta the saved status of current configuration one in the non volatile memory of the Head station Figure 4 23 Configuration Management web page Possible States for Status of current configuration The configuration has been modified but not saved also indicated by the flashing floppy disk icon Saving the current configuration The current configuration is equal to the one saved in
202. n Configuration and Diagnostics flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 3 Octet string 1 255 Read This object indicates the status of the DHCP relay agent The status is affected by The flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpCtrl object The assignment mechanism for the IP parameters flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpRIdType 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 4 Integer IP address 1 MAC address 2 Read and write This object indicates whether the DHCP relay agent specifies its MAC address or its IP address as the remote ID when completing the fields for DHCP option 82 default IP address flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 1 This table provides port specific information for the DHCP relay agent fiSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortCtrllndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read This object specifies the port number flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortCtrlOperation OID Syntax Access Description 6874 en 09 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 1 2 Integer32 Read write Here the DHCP relay agent at this port can be activated or deactivated DHCP relay agent at this port deactivated 1 DHCP relay agent at this port activated 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 115 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 116 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 4 Management via Local V 24 RS 232 Communication Interface 4 4 1 General F
203. n 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 15 FL SWITCH MM HS SNMP Agent Trap Destination 4 16 PHOENIX CONTACT SNMP Trap Configuration Menu The send traps function can be globally enabled disabled here Figure 4 17 SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Agent sending traps Trap Destination First trap manager IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fiease enter IP addresses in dotted decimal notation Teo T 2 T5 16 2300 second trap manager IP address Trap Confiquration SNMP Authentification Failure Password modification Firmware status changed Configuration not saved Power Supply Port Security by Mac Address R STP Ring Failure R JSTP New Root HIH Topology changed Cold Start Warm Start Link Down Link Up PoE Port Status POF SCRJ Port Status Enter password Disable Disable C Disable C Disable C Disable C Disable CO Disable C Disable Disable C Disable C Disable C Disable Disable Disable C Disable C Disable o SNMP Trap Connection Test For a test of the connection between this snmp agent and a network management tool you have to configure the target ip address for the trap and Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable sending traps must be enabled Then you can send a the trap trapManagenonnection with the same object id 1 5 6 T
204. n Between Devices When connecting two glass fiber interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver The maximum length of the glass fiber cables depends on the fiber type used 3 2 6 FL IF TX POF 10 100 Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 2 6 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated for the twisted pair port and the auto negotiation function is activated for the POF port Port monitoring is not activated for the two ports If an interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 2 6 2 Functions of the POF Interface Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a POF path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected networ
205. n be represented in decimal or hexadecimal form In decimal notation bytes are separated by dots dotted decimal notation to show the logical grouping of the individual bytes 35 The decimal points do not divide the address into a network and user address Only the value of the first bits before the first zero specifies the network class and the number of remaining bits in the address 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 3 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 4 Class A 0 0 0 0 127 255 255 255 Class B Possible Address Combinations 7 bits 24 bits 14 bits 16 bits 1280 00 191 255 285288 9 NMwekID Host Class C 2090 225255 Amen Class D 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Class E 21 bits 8 bits go poy 28 bits HD Identifier for multicast group 27 bits aem 240 0 0 0 247 255 255 255 afalafafo Reserved for future applications PHOENIX CONTACT Figure 3 2 Structure of IP addresses 3 1 2 3 Special IP Addresses for Special Applications Certain IP addresses are reserved for special functions The following addresses should not be used as standard IP addresses 127 x x x Addresses The Class A network address 127 is reserved for a loopback function on all computers regardless of the network class This loopback function may only be used on networked computers for internal test purposes If a telegram is addressed to a computer with the value 127 in the first byte the receiver im
206. n the head station and system bus firmware 4 00 or later in the extension modules If this requirement is not met in the head station or in any extension module then PoE management is not available in the entire system PoE interface modules can operate without management and without management support No configuration options and no diagnostic data are available connected termination devices are nevertheless supplied with power The system bus firmware is displayed on the Device Information General web page The PoE configuration options are also available if no PoE interface module is inserted If a PoE interface module is inserted the configuration is transmitted to the module after a few seconds Features of PoE Mode Up to twelve PoE interface modules with a total of 24 ports can be operated at the same time in an MMS Configuration transmission on the interface module is only possible if there is a connected 48 V supply The following management functions are available Display error states for each port and communicate via the alarm contact yes no Connect disconnect voltage for each port Current limitation for loads classified as Class 1 devices The following diagnostic information is displayed No error Surge voltage undervoltage Thermal error Overload Disconnected load the current consumption at this port is less than 10 mA the supply voltage is disconnected by the PoE module No 48 V s
207. n the relevant device trapPasswdAccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 1 Sent to the defined trap receiver on each modification or attempted modification of the device password and contains information about the status of the last modification or attempted modification trapFWHealth 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 2 Sent on each firmware related modification to the diagnostic display and contains additional information about the firmware status trapFWConf 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 3 Sent each time the configuration is saved and informs the management station that the configuration has been saved successfully This trap is sent in the event of configuration modifications port name port mode device name IP address trap receiver address port mirroring etc which are not yet saved permanently The trap also provides a warning that if not saved permanently the modifications will be lost on a reset PHOENIX CONTACT 4 41 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description 4 42 PHOENIX CONTACT trapPowerSupply 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 4 Sent each time the redundant voltage supply fails trapSecurityPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 5 Sent each time a disabled MAC address accesses a port trapRstpRingFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 6 Sent in the event of a link interrupt in the redundant RSTP ring trapPofScrjPort 1 3 6 1 4
208. nce 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 2 1 pBridgeGroups 1 pBridgeExtCapGroup 2 pBridgeDeviceGmrpGroup 3 pBridgeDevicePriorityGroup 4 6 pBridgePriorityGroup 7 pBridgeAccessPriorityGroup 4 60 PHOENIX CONTACT pBridgeDefaultPriorityGroup 5 pBridgeRegentPriorityGroup 6874_en_09 Configuration and Diagnostics 8 pBridgePortGarpGroup 9 pBridgePortGmrpGroup 10 pBridgeHCPortGroup 11 pBridgePortOverflowGroup 2 pBridgeCompliances 1 pBridgeCompliance 4 3 7 qBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 4 3 7 1 qBridgeMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 1 dotiqBase 1 dotqVLANVersionNumber 2 dotqMaxVLANId 3 dot1qMaxSupportedVLANs 4 dotiqNumVLANs 5 dot1qGvrpStatus 2 dot qTp 1 dot1qFdbTable 1 dot1qFdbEntry 1 dotiqFdbld 2 dot1qFdbDynamicCount 2 dot1qTpFdbTable 1 dot1qTpFdbEntry 1 dot1qTpFdbAddress 2 dot1qTpFdbPort 3 dotiqT pFdbStatus 3 dot1qTpGroupTable 1 dot1qTpGroupEntry 1 dot1qTpGroupAddress 2 dot1qTpGroupEgressPorts 3 dot1qTpGroupLearnt 4 dot1qForwardAllTable 1 dot1qForwardAllEntry 1 dot1qForwardAllPorts 2 dot1qForwardAllStaticPorts 3 dot1qForwardAllForbiddenPorts 5 dot1qForwardUnregistered Table 1 dot1qForwardUnregisteredEntry 1 dot1qForwardUnregisteredPorts 2 dot1qForwardUnregisteredStaticPorts 3 d
209. nected to edge ports An alternate port is a path to the root which however did not become a root port l e this port is not part of the active topology 5 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Multicast Filtering 6 Multicast Filtering Multicast 6874 en 09 6 1 Basics Multicast applications unlike unicast applications with point to point communication do not transmit their data with the MAC address of the destination but with an independent multicast group address Always using connectionless communication a station transmits one data packet that is received by one or more receiver stations Advantages 1 f for example a data packet of a transmitter is to be transmitted to eight receivers the same packet does not have to be sent eight times to the addresses of all eight devices Instead it only needs to be sent once to the address of the multicast group that includes the eight devices 2 When using multicast communication and filtering the required bandwidth for data transmission is reduced because each packet can only be transmitted once A maximum of 20 multicast groups can be created 6 2 Enabling the Web Pages for Multicast Filtering in WBM Activate WBM for the switches e g using the Factory Manager Switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate Multicast Filtering and confirm by entering your password When activating Multicast Filtering under General Configuration
210. nfiguration and Diagnostics pxcBasicName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 1 Display string Read Contains the manufacturer s name Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG pxcBasicDescr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 2 Display string Read Contains the manufacturer s name and address Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG P O Box 1341 D 32819 Blomberg pxcBasicURL 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 3 Display string Read Contains the manufacturer s web address http www phoenixcontact com 4 3 11 3 pxcFactoryLine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 flGlobal 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 flBasic 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 flBasicName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 1 Display string Read Contains the name of the product group Factory Line PHOENIX CONTACT 4 69 FL SWITCH MM HS flBasicDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 2 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains a brief description of the product group Ethernet Installation System flBasicURL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains a specific URL for the product group www factoryline de flBasicCompCapacity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 4 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Contains the number of different components that can be managed with this device flComponents OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 flComponentsTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 flComponentsTableEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 Syntax Access Description Generates a tabl
211. nformation about the traps fIWorkFWCtrlTrapEnablelndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 1 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object identifies the trap using the trap ID fIWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableOid OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 2 Syntax Object identifier Access Read Description Indicates the trap OID fIWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description This object identifies the trap using the trap name fiWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read write Description This object indicates the transmit status of the trap While the sending of traps is activated each trap can be deactivated individually 4 92 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flWorkFWCtriPasswd OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 flWorkFWCtriPasswdSet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 1 Syntax Octet string 2 24 Access Read and write 35 For security reasons the response is always with read access Description A new password can be entered here with a maximum of 12 characters Example Your new password should be factory3 The password must be entered a second time for confirmation Your entry factory3factory3 Your password for write access is now factory3 flWorkFWCtriPasswdSuccess OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 2 Syntax Integer Access Read
212. ng Operation With the Memory Module Display Meaning o O 0P Parameterization data being read from the plug in memory EC Equal configuration the configurations on the memory module and in the head station are the same dC Different configuration the configurations on the memory module and in the head station are different The memory module is empty 1 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Modular Managed Switch System In the Event of an Error Display The device software e Update the firmware via the serial interface faulty Firmware transfer via TFTP or Check the physical connection Xmodem failed display changes Establish a point to point connection from 03 to 177 Make sure that the file with the specified file name exists and is in the correct directory Check the IP address of the TFTP server Activate the TFTP server Repeat the download File transfer was completed Provide a valid firmware version with the previously specified successfully but the file is not a file name valid firmware version for the Internet www phoenixcontact com Modular Managed Switch System Repeat the download An error has occurred in the Restart the device power up or reset firmware Make sure that the IP address is not used more than once in the same network The switch is or was in an Restart the device exceptional situation Check your network for configuration errors loops l
213. ng and forwarding method only within the MMS however when forwarding to the receiver the packets are in the original state The Low port prioritization means that the priority of packets received at this port is not influenced by the switch This implies that existing tags must be taken into consideration or that other priority rules must be observed Setting the Port Priority Port Configuration Port Number DES Module HS Interface Al Type Tx 10900 Port Name Port 2 Status Disable Enable Priority Level De Low C High Figure 3 20 Setting the port priority Onthe Port Configuration web page both available priority levels can be selected under Priority Level 3 3 4 3 Strict Priority The switch supports two priority queues for adjusting the packet processing sequence traffic classes according to IEEE 802 1D Data telegrams that are received are assigned to these classes according to their priority which is specified in the VLAN prioritization tag Data packets with values between 0 and 3 in the priority field are low priority default Data packets with values between 4 and 7 in the priority field are high priority and transmitted via the switch MMS uses Strict Priority for transmitting data telegrams First all high priority data packets are assigned once these are transmitted low priority telegrams are assigned This function prevents delays in high priority d
214. ng time has elapsed the port is reenabled automatically 35 The Port Security function is only suitable for ports to which termination devices are connected It is not recommended to use this function for backbone or uplink ports especially if RSTP is activated Enter the enabled MAC addresses as well as a name under Allowed MAC Addresses Port Security Part Number Module HS Interface d Fart Name Port 9 Mane Trap only security Mode Black packets Black packets with automatic reenabling Last Learned Source Mac Address DOC UU UU UL Description MAC Address o o o Allowed Marc Addresses 0 o legal Address Counter 0 Current Security State Ok The port securty is disabled You find the global port securty status at the web page Services Port Configuration of port General Security PoE RISTE VLAN Figure 4 39 Port Security web page 4 32 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics The Unlock button can be used to disable the port block Last Source MAC Address indicates the last MAC address that accessed the port If the port is blocked the MAC address responsible for the block is indicated here Ports Power over Ethernet Port Table Menu This menu displays the available PoE status information for each port Power over Ethernet Port Table PoE operational Interface SEIS Module Port PoE fault status Ma PoE
215. nt display see also page 1 15 Procedure Connect the switch to your PC via the serial V 24 RS 232 interface Make sure that your HyperTerminal is configured correctly see configuration on page 4 116 Restart the switch gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com BIOS version X XX Press any key to stop booting 1 ENTER a TO DOWNLOAD SWITCH SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER e TO CONTINUE BOOTING PxC MMS systemprompt 68740010 Figure 4 54 Screen displayed on HyperTerminal when booting If the device firmware is faulty the following message appears gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com Press any key to stop booting 0 booting continues SOFTWARE IMAGE CORRUPTED YOU HAVE TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER a TO DOWNLOAD SWITCH SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER e TO CONTINUE BOOTING PxC MMS systemprompt gt 68740024 Figure 4 55 Selection menu for faulty firmware 4 120 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Press a to download the new software The following message appears gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com ENTER a TO DOWNLOAD SWITCH SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER e TO CO
216. nterval s Os up to 3600s The value 0 for the refresh interval disables the automatic refreshing Enter password Figure 4 20 User Interfaces web page Access Control Menu Here you can specify the IP addresses from which access to the web interface is permitted To do so enter the IP address in dotted notation and select whether read only or read write access is to be assigned As an option another name can be assigned under Description Access to WBM can be configured for a maximum of ten IP addresses 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 19 FL SWITCH MM HS Access Control for Web Interface Access Control C Disable Enable No IP Address Description Access C Daad 182 168 1 42 Network Admin 2 RESI Uu Ge Bead Mrite C Bean 192 168 1 221 WEM Admin ec Ge Dead Ate Ce d Allowed address r AGEL Qu Read Write Figure 4 21 Access Control for Web Interface web page 35 Due to configuration errors you may accidentally block your own access In this case you can disable access control via the serial interface using the Access Control for Web button Operating Mode Web Page Operating as a In this menu select whether the switch is to operate as a PROFINET device For additional PROFINET device information on operation as a PROFINET device see Section 8 Operating as a PROFINET Device Operating Mode Gei D efault Mod ns O Frofinet Mode Profinet Activating the
217. odule has been snapped on properly check that it is fixed securely on the DIN rail Check whether the positive latches are facing upwards i e snapped on correctly 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 1 2 2 FL SWITCH MM HS Removal 1 Remove all plug in connections or interface modules 2 Pull down the positive latches using a suitable tool e g screwdriver Both positive latches remain snapped out Then swivel the bottom of the module away from the DIN rail slightly A Next lift the module upwards away from the DIN rail B e DE off MD O Le h Be od mA Figure 2 2 Removal of the head station PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Assembly and Installation 2 2 Assembly and Removal of Extension Modules Always switch off the supply voltage when assembling removing the extension modules Assembly 1 Place the module onto the DIN rail from above A The upper holding keyway must be hooked onto the top edge of the DIN rail Push the module from the front towards the mounting surface B Check that the positive latches have snapped on properly As Figure 2 3 Assembly of extension modules 2 Now that the extension module is snapped onto the DIN rail push it along the DIN rail towards the head station until the male connector female connector of the modules are interlatched and the sides of the modules lie flush with one another dau 7 uu
218. ollowing format port xyz TLV chassis ID with subtype locally assigned transmits the station name The Discovery and Configuration Protocol DCP is activated as the mechanism for assigning IP parameters The station name system name is deleted if the value for the System Name object contains the device type default upon delivery In addition when switching to PROFINET mode the configuration is saved automatically and the device is restarted The switch then starts in PROFINET mode for the first time and waits for a PROFINET IP address to be assigned At this point the switch is already visible in the network via LLDP with the default name FL SWITCH MM HS and the IP address 0 0 0 0 Waiting for a valid IP configuration via DCP is indicated by the switch with dP in the display and by the flashing of the LED for the currently active mode The switch cannot be accessed via other network services such as ping at this time PHOENIX CONTACT 8 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Operating Mode Default Mod See O Frofinet Mode Profinet Activating the mode Profinet the following settings wil be done a select ip address assignment LCP m szable LELDE m clear the default System Name ike FI SWITCH MM AS m save fhe confRwguration m execuie a reboot Changing from the mode Frofinet to an other mode the following ceilings will be done independentlv of the setting before selecting the mode profuet a select ip addre
219. on See FL IF 2TX VS RJ on page 3 9 and onwards and FL IF 2HCS 100 on page 3 14 and onwards PHOENIX CONTACT 3 21 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 8 FL IF MEM 2TX D Make sure that only one memory module is inserted If more than one module is inserted 33 the switch indicates error code 87 on the display Remove all but one of the memory modules and restart the switch The interface module has two twisted pair interfaces in addition to the parameterization memory To distinguish it from other 2TX interface modules it is supplied in charcoal gray housing The parameterization memory is used to store device data which is modified by the user and stored retentively The memory module is supported by firmware Version 2 03 or later Firmware Versions 2 03 treat the memory module as a standard FL IF 2TX VS RJ The use of memory modules requires the application of system bus firmware 4 20 or later in the head station The system bus firmware for your head station is displayed on the Device Information General web page Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management qj amp If the module is removed when saving the configuration is not saved The saving procedure is finished as soon as the display no longer indicates SC or when the status Current Configuration was saved
220. one of the MMS messages and select the Add new device menu item Under Description select an icon and enter a device name Specify the desired IP parameters under TCP IP see also Assigning IP Parameters on page 3 2 D Boob Description Name JEthemet Device Type FL SWITCH MM HS TCPAP IP Address 192 1768 002 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Cancel Add Figure 4 2 Input mask for IP parameters 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 35 Make sure that the assignment of IP parameters via BootP is also activated Once you have clicked on Add the device is added to the project and is indicated as unavailable You must now restart or reset the MMS Following a restart the MMS resends the BootP requests and receives the corresponding BootP reply from the Factory Manager Once the boot process has been completed the MMS is indicated as available If the MMS is still indicated as unavailable check your network card settings Please 33 note that both devices must be located in the same network subnetwork If the Factory Manager receives the BootP requests this does not mean that the devices are located in the same subnetwork as the BootP requests are sent as a broadcast beyond subnetwork boundaries 4 1 3 Configuration and Diagnostics Numerous options for configuring and diagnosing the MMS can be found in the Device menu under Properties Genera
221. onnection format Wavelength Laser protection Minimum transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Maximum Static transmission power fiber type Minimum Maximum Minimum receiver sensitivity Maximum overrange Transmission speed Ethernet Interface SC Single Mode Number Connection format Wavelength Laser protection Minimum transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Maximum Minimum receiver sensitivity Maximum overrange Transmission speed Ethernet Interfaces POF SMA Number Connection format Data transmission rate Wavelength Minimum cable length Transmission length including 3 dB system reserve 6874 en 09 500 V AC for one minute 900 mA 40 W 2 SC duplex female connector on the switch 1300 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 2001 11 6 4 km glass fiber with F G 50 125 0 7 dB km F1200 2 8 km glass fiber with F G 50 125 1 6 dB km F800 10 km glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 0 7 dB km F1000 3 0 km glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 2 6 dB km F1000 23 5 dBm 50 125 um 20 dBm 62 5 125 um 14 dBm 50 125 um 14 dBm 62 5 125 um 20 5 dBm 50 125 umy 17 dBm 62 5 125 um 11 dBm 50 125 umy 11 dBm 62 5 125 um 31 dBm dynamic 28 dBm static 14 dBm dynamic 11 dBm static 100 Mbps 2 SC duplex female connector on the switch
222. ons CAT6 Patch angle with eight RJ45 network connections CAT6 Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 0 3 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 0 5 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 1 0 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 1 5 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 2 0 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 3 0 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 5 0 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 7 5 m long Patch cable CAT 5 pre assembled 10 0 m long Polymer fiber connectors two duplex connectors in the set Polishing set for polymer fiber connectors required to assemble polymer fiber connectors Fiber optic polymer fiber cable for indoor installation HCS fiber connectors two duplex connectors in the set Tool kit for HCS connectors required to assemble HCS fiber connectors Fiber optic HCS cable for indoor installation Fiber optic HCS cable for outdoor installation 6874 en 09 Technical Data and Ordering Data Order Designation FL CB IF FLMLABEL VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 FL PLUG RJ45 GR 2 FL PLUG RJ45 GN 2 FL CRIMPTOOL FL SWT FL SNMP OPC SERVER FL PBX 8TX FL PBX 6TX 4FX FL PF SEC 2TX FL PF SEC 8TX FL PF 2TX CATSE FL PF 8TX CATSE FL PF 2TX CAT 6 FL PF 8TX CAT 6 FL CAT5 PATCH 0 3 FL CAT5 PATCH 0 5 FL CAT5 PATCH 1 0 FL CATS PATCH 1 5 FL CAT5 PATCH 2 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 3 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 5 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 7 5 FL CAT5 PATCH 10 PSM SET SCRJ DUP 2 POF VS SCRJ POF POLISH PSM LW
223. oose contacts poor line quality faulty network interfaces Make sure that there are no Denial of Service attacks Link monitoring has detected at Check the cables connectors least one faulty link In web based management check at which port link monitoring see page 4 26 is indicating an error Restore the data connection to this port or deactivate link monitoring for this port Check the correct position of the interface module on the head station or on the extension module The switch is operating as a Set the desired configuration at the switch PROFINET IO device The Modify the control program so that it contains the existing configuration of the switch and the switch configuration configuration transmitted by the PROFINET engineering tool are different More than one parameterization Remove all but one of the memory modules and execute a memory has been plugged in reset 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 15 FL SWITCH MM HS Display bF System bus error Make sure that the extension modules are plugged in Bus Fail correctly Restart the switch Power over Ethernet monitoring has been activated on at least one port and an error has occurred Check the physical connection at the PoE ports and the settings in WBM Hardware support At least one interface module is inserted in the MMS that is not fully supported by the MMS hardware version used The interface module transmits data the management functions are deactiv
224. oot switch is the designated switch for all directly connected networks 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree Selecting a Root Port Once the root switch has been specified by processing the root IDs the switches now specify the root ports The most favorable path is specified by minimizing all connection costs on the path to the root switch In addition transmission speeds can also serve as costs For the switch the path costs added by each port for every HOP the hop of a data packet from one point to the next are preset to a value of 19 default setting recommended for 100 Mbps and can be modified at any time by the user Selecting a Designated Port At every designated switch the port with the most cost effective data connection in the direction of the root switch is called the designated port Port Costs The port costs can be set according to two different standards 802 1D STP or 801 1W RSTP If in addition to Phoenix Contact devices devices from other manufacturers are also used it is recommended that the port costs are set according to a uniform standard The dot1dstpPathCostDefault SNMP object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 2 18 can be used to change the standard that is used Table 5 2 Port costs according to 802 D Transmission Speed Recommended Value Recommended Range Table 5 3 Port costs according to 802 W Transmission Speed Recommended Value Recommended Range 10 Mbps 2 000 000 200 000 20
225. orarily If the sending of traps was not deactivated two traps are generated newRoot OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 topologyChange OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 5 2 4 2 Interrupted Data Paths and Port States The described data path interruption by the Spanning Tree Protocol is created by disconnecting individual ports that no longer forward any data packets A port can have the following states Learning Forwarding Blocking Discarding Disabled link down or disconnected by the user The current port states are shown in the web interface 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree The properties of the various port states are shown in the table below Table 5 1 Properties of the port states Receiving and Evaluating Learning the MAC Forwarding Data Packets BPDUS Learning the Addresses of Connected Normal Switching Function Topology Devices and Creating Switching Tables Disabled Blocking Discarding Forwarding Lx LL The sequence of the five port states defined in the Spanning Tree Protocol cannot be assigned freely The following diagram illustrates the possible sequence of the port states Disabled Blocking Learning p Forwarding 68749043 Figure 5 11 Sequence of the possible port states in STP After device startup and if necessary also during topology modification a port passes through the states in the following order Learning
226. ot1qForwardUnregisteredForbiddenPorts 3 dot1qStatic 1 dot1qStaticUnicastTable 1 dot1qStaticUnicastEntry 1 dot1qStaticUnicastAddress 2 dot1qStaticUnicastReceivePort 3 dot1qStaticUnicastAllowedToGoTo 4 dot1qStaticUnicastStatus SN cm Ae 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 61 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 62 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 dot1qStaticMulticastTable 1 dot1qStaticMulticastEntry 1 dot1qStaticMulticastAddress 2 dot1qStaticMulticastReceivePort 3 dot1qStaticMulticastStaticEgressPorts 4 dot1qStaticMulticastForbiddenEgressPorts 5 dot1qStaticMulticastStatus 4 dot1qVLAN 1 dot1qVLANNumDeletes 2 dot1qVLANCurrentTable 1 dot qVLANCurrentEntry 1 dot1qVLANTimeMark 2 dot1qVLANIndex 3 dotiqVLANFdblid 4 dotiqVLANCurrentEgressPorts ST T 5 dot qVLANCurrentUntaggedPorts 6 dot1qVLANStatus 7 dotiqVLANCreationTime 3 dot1qVLANStaticTable 1 dot1qVLANStaticEntry 1 dotqVLANStaticName 2 dot1qVLANStaticEgressPorts 3 dot1qVLANForbiddenEgressPorts 4 dot1qVLANStaticUntaggedPorts 5 dot1qVLANStaticRowStatus 4 dot1qNextFreeLocalVLANIndex 5 dotiqPortVLANTable 1 dot1qPortVLANEntry 1 dot1qPvid 2 dot1qPortAcceptableFrameT ypes 3 dot1qPortingressFiltering 4 dot1qPortGvrpStatus 5 dot1qPortGvrpFailedRegistrations 6 dot1qPortGvrpLastPduOrigin 6 dot1qPortVLANStatistics Ta
227. otice insofar as this is reasonable for the user The same applies to any technical changes that serve the purpose of technical progress The receipt of technical documentation in particular data sheets installation instructions manuals etc does not constitute any further duty on the part of Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG to furnish information on alterations to products and or technical documentation Any other agreement shall only apply if expressly confirmed in writing by Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG Please note that the supplied documentation is product specific documentation only and that you are responsible for checking the suitability and intended use of the products in your specific application in particular with regard to observing the applicable standards and regulations Although Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG makes every effort to ensure that the informa tion content is accurate up to date and state of the art technical inaccuracies and or printing errors in the information cannot be ruled out Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG does not offer any guarantees as to the reliability accuracy or completeness of the infor mation All information made available in the technical data is supplied without any accompanying guarantee whether expressly mentioned implied or tacitly assumed Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG accepts no liability or responsibility for errors or omis sions in the content of the technical doc
228. p E H E H E eceiver om Plies E om flee L ust us sd 00A0451BDD ea p 00A0451BDD a rat ust ano mom vat O6 ust ano mom va Py Receiver R i TRR HODE TNEWODE UNKWODE INKWODE IPHCENIX aer 100 ro 120 KS ee ee CONTACT DE 2m0 2m0 2m 2mm ca FL SWITCH MM HS om x x i No 2832326 F Bg zi D L S 3 ust 00A04518DD se oo E LOUPOMOot ON IOC ot IOLO e ioqognougo H aa eo Receiver Receiver Receiver Receiver Figure 6 3 Configuration example Possible redundant paths must be taken into consideration when using Rapid Spanning Tree for multicast group creation
229. pModules 4346 phoenixContact 1 snmpMIB 1 system Ty eem 3 address translation Lei 5 icmp 6 tcp 7 udp 8 egp 10 transmission 11 snmp 16 rmon 17 dot1dBridge 30 ianaifType Figure 4 48 Tree structure of the MIB 31 ifMib 6146B029 Not all devices support all object classes If an unsupported object class is requested 33 not supported is generated If an attempt is made to modify an unsupported object class the message badValue is generated 4 44 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_09 Configuration and Diagnostics OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 3 3 RFC1213 MIB MIB Il 4 3 3 1 System Group 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 The system group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains system specific objects If an agent does not have a value for a variable the response is a string with length 0 1 system 1 sysDescr 2 sysObjectID sysUpTime sysContact sysName sysLocation sysServices sysORLastChange SysORTable C2 4 N O A CO r NS S Te Te Te Te Tse Uum US CUm mmm A 9 sysDescr 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 Octet string size O 255 Read A textual description of the entry The value should contain the full name and version number of Type of system hardware Operation system software Network software The description may only consist of ASCII characters that can be printed sysObjectID 1 3 6 1
230. ping of different IP groups to the same MAC group Avoid the use of IP groups That do not differ in the first and second byte from the right That differ by 128 in the third byte from the right The fourth byte from the right is always replaced by 01 00 5e during conversion See example below 6874 en 09 Multicast Filtering Because of the conversion from IP to MAC addresses you should avoid using IP 33 addresses that differ with regard to the third byte from the right by 128 Example 3rd byte from the right 1st multicast IP address 228 CR 117 216 2nd multicast IP address 230 MISS 117 216 Difference 128 Both multicast IP addresses are converted into the multicast MAC address 01 00 5e 1e 75 d8 The group is added to the list of existing static multicast groups This list which is displayed in a list box is referred to as dot1qStaticMulticastTable in SNMP 3 Settings are not automatically saved permanently The active configuration can be saved permanently by selecting Save current configuration on the Configuration Management web page Port assignment After entering a new group in the Multicast Group Address field add the ports of the group members by selecting the corresponding checkboxes Confirm by entering your password and clicking on Apply 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Modifying assignment Checking group assignment Incorrect format 6 4
231. problems occur that cannot be resolved with the help of this documentation please contact our hotline 49 0 52 35 34 18 88 mi factoryline service nphoenixcontact com iu ac 11 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 A Appendix index oymbols Private Dassword 4 18 Vo SCAG pP EN 4 37 Numerics A le el EE 3 5 127 XXX addres565 ee echte ose bep 3 4 AOV SUDD Y esee ee 3 24 segment display eeeseeeeeeeeeee 1 14 A Access Controls sisne a 4 19 Access Control for Web 4 20 Address e eu le 3 4 Eege 4 41 AGING UEC E 3 1 4 31 PGE COMA Le EE 2 11 Allowed MAC Addresses nnannnnnennnenenneenennennen 4 32 Alternate POF EE 5 26 Afalysis ODHOfi ua a cire ricas et Exe Ege eu E pepe conde xb us 4 39 ANDINO MT 3 5 ASSOeITIDIV EN 2 3 Assigning IP addresses nnnnneeennenneereenerren reenn 3 3 Assigning IP parameters 3 2 Assignment of F SMA porte 3 13 Assignment of the RJ45 female connector 3 11 PAULO ChOSSING ME 3 9 Auto Be et le 3 9 Auto DONS A ditte oni andre pb ae ogee aah 3 9 B Barg aD EE 4 37 Basic switch configuration sssuuussss 4 118 slc Mc a ee 4 33 Block Packets A 4 31 Block packets with automatic reenabling 4 32 BOO cc soutenu LU LE 4 14 BOOP TOPIV usd iru ipee aepo Iove dic uus ogee doe aa Qus 4 14 Bootstrap pDrotocol onai 4 14 BFOUDPaCKEIS uita tu eus ieu 3 32 Bidde MIB EE 4 40 6874 en 09
232. ptions to transmit the link status of the fiber optic side to the twisted pair side If a link down is not detected at the switch due to the cable interrupt between the media converters and if no link down is forced at the switch timer based detection is activated which may result in longer switch over times For short switch over times structure your network in such a way that a maximum of seven switches are located in a cascade up to the root switch The switch over times can range from 100 ms to 2 s Use priority assignment to specify a central switch as the root Itis also recommended to assign a switch as the backup root For short switch over times all switches in the redundant topology should support the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol and should not use hubs 5 2 5 1 Connecting the Switches to Form a Meshed Topology Having activated Rapid Spanning Tree for all switches you can create a meshed topology with redundant data paths Any data connections can now be created without taking loops into consideration Loops can even be added on purpose in order to create redundant connections A data path between Spanning Tree switches can be A direct connection A connection via one or more additional switches that do not support Spanning Tree If Spanning Tree is not supported by all of the switches used the reconfiguration time for Spanning Tree is extended by the aging time of switches without Spanning
233. r over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Simplified port configuration IGMP query Version 1 and 2 Firmware 4 50 offers the following additional functions Support of the POF SCRJ interface module and corresponding diagnostics SNMP traps can be disabled individually The VLAN for management can be set VLAN ID to manage web SNMP ping IGMP query the switch in VLAN Tagging mode DHCP relay agent can be disabled according to the port PROFINET alarms and configuration comparison Fast aging on link down PHOENIX CONTACT 1 5 FL SWITCH MM HS Extended LED diagnostics identification of the switch in the PROFINET environment and detection of the Missing IP parameter following restart status PoE traps when the PoE status changes Test traps to check communication Deletion of the MAC address table from WBM and SNMP 1 1 3 Firmware Functions and the Required Hardware Table 1 1 Functions and the required hardware Required Hardware for the Required Hardware for the Head Station Extension Modules Standard switch Hardware Version 2 3 functions includes system bus Version 4 1 Memory module Hardware Version 2 A support includes system bus Version 4 2 PoE module Hardware Version 2 6 support includes system bus Version 5 0 POF SCRJ module Hardware Version 2 6 support includes system bus Version 5 0 1 1 3 1 Front View of the Head Station LED diagnostic and status in
234. ragments 64 bytes are rejected Valid data telegrams are forwarded by the switch 3 3 2 Multi Address Function The switch learns all the source addresses for each port Only packets with Unknown source addresses A source address for this port Amulticast broadcast address are forwarded to the destination address field via the relevant port The switch can learn up to 8000 addresses This is important when more than one termination device is connected to one or more ports In this way several independent subnetworks can be connected to one switch 3 3 3 Learning Addresses The MMS independently learns the addresses for termination devices which are connected via a port by evaluating the source addresses in the data telegram When the MMS receives a data telegram it only forwards this data telegram to the port that connects to the specified device if the address could be learned beforehand The MMS can learn up to 8000 addresses and stores them in its table The switch monitors the age of the learned addresses The switch automatically deletes address entries from its address table that have exceeded a specific age default 40 seconds adjustable from 10 to 825 seconds aging time All learned entries are deleted on a restart A list of detected MAC addresses can be found in the MAC address table see Diagnostics MAC Address Table Menu on page 4 39 The MAC address table can be deleted via Clear PHOEN
235. rail 468 x 95 x 107 depth from top edge of DIN rail 0 C to 55 C 20 C to 70 C IP20 DIN 40050 IEC 60529 Class 3 VDE 0106 IEC 60536 Class 1 according to EN 60825 1 10 to 95 no condensation 10 to 95 no condensation 80 kPa to 108 kPa 2000 m above sea level 70 kPa to 108 kPa 3000 m above sea level Perpendicular to a standard DIN rail Snapped onto a grounded DIN rail 1350 g typical 2 maximum Via COMBICON conductor cross section 2 5 mm 24 V DC SELV 18 0 V DC to 32 0 V DC 500 V DC for one minute 0 35 3 25 A depending on configuration extensions interface modules 8 4 W 78 W depending on configuration extensions interface modules see example on page 11 5 PHOENIX CONTACT 11 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Interfaces at the Head Station Number of slots for interface modules Connection medium Number of Ethernet ports Head station Head station and one extension module Head station and two extension modules System interface for extension module Number of extension modules Transmitted signals V 24 RS 232 communication interface Connection format Floating alarm contact Voltage Current carrying capacity Interfaces at the Extension Modules Number of slots for interface modules Connection medium Number of Ethernet ports System interface for extension module Transmitted signals RJ45 Interfaces Standard Number Connection format Connection medium Cable impedance Transmission sp
236. rd Apply Figure 10 1 Relay Agent web page The DHCP Relay Agent function and IP address assignment via DHCP cannot be activated at the same time 6874_en_09 Technical Data and Ordering Data 11 Technical Data and Ordering Data 11 1 General Data Function Switch principle Address table SNMP Transmission capacity per port 64 byte packet size half duplex Supported MIBs Housing dimensions width x height x depth in mm Head station Head station with one extension module Head station with two extension modules Permissible operating temperature Permissible storage temperature Degree of protection Protection class Laser protection fiber optic interface modules Humidity Operation Storage Air pressure Operation Storage Mounting position Connection to protective earth ground Weight of head station Supply Voltage US1 US2 Redundant Connection Nominal value Permissible voltage range Test voltage Typical current consumption on US at 24 V DC Typical power consumption 6874 en 09 Technical Data Modular Managed Ethernet Fast Ethernet Switch conforms to standard IEEE 802 3 Store and forward 8000 MAC addresses Version 1 and 2c At 10 Mbps 14 880 pps packets per second At 100 Mbps 148 800 pps MIB Il RMON MIB bridge MIB If MIB Etherlike MIB and Phoenix Contact private SNMP objects 214 x 95 x 107 depth from top edge of DIN rail 341 x 95 x 107 depth from top edge of DIN
237. rd must be between four and twelve characters long Please note that the password is always transmitted via the network in unencrypted format Forgotten your password 4 8 Call the Phoenix Contact phone number listed in the Appendix making sure you have the device serial number and MAC address to hand User Interfaces Menu The following actions can be executed here Activation deactivation of the Telnet server Activation deactivation of the web server Activation deactivation of the SNMP agent Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for redundancy mechanisms Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for multicast filtering Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for VLAN Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for the DHCP relay agent 35 With the activation deactivation of the configuration pages under User Interfaces only the web pages for configuring the selected functions are enabled disabled in the WBM menu Setting the refresh intervals for the automatic update of the web pages Here you can also set the refresh interval for automatic update of different web pages If the interval is set to 0 the pages will no longer be updated Automatic update of web pages is only possible when using Internet Explorer 33 Version 5 5 or later 4 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics User Interfaces
238. rd party products resulting from disregard of information contained in this manual Explanation of Symbols Used The attention symbol refers to an operating procedure which if not carefully followed could result in damage to hardware and software or personal injury The note symbol informs you of conditions that must be strictly observed to achieve error free operation It also gives you tips and advice on the efficient use of hardware and on software optimization to save you extra work The text symbol refers to detailed sources of information manuals data sheets literature etc on the subject matter product etc This text also provides helpful information for the orientation in the manual We Are Interested in Your Opinion We are constantly striving to improve the quality of our manuals Should you have any suggestions or recommendations for improvement of the contents and layout of our manuals please send us your comments PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH amp Co KG Documentation Services 32823 Blomberg Germany Phone 49 0 52 35 30 0 Fax 49 0 52 35 34 18 08 E mail tecdoc phoenixcontact com 6874 en 09 6874 en 09 FL SWITCH MM HS General Terms and Conditions of Use for Technical Documentation Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG reserves the right to alter correct and or improve the technical documentation and the products described in the technical documentation at its own discretion and without giving prior n
239. re considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 2 6 4 Network Connection The switch position for transmission power reduction will only be indicated in the web interface in future hardware versions See FL IF 2TX VS RJ on page 3 9 and onwards and FL IF 2POF 10 100 on page 3 11 and onwards 3 2 7 FL IF TX HCS 100 Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 2 7 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated for the twisted pair port and the data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps full duplex for the HCS port Port monitoring is not activated for the two ports If an interface module is inserted in an MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 2 7 2 Functions of the HCS Interface Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition an HCS path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt
240. rements must be met so that the Spanning Tree Protocol can network segment does not contain any loops Additional infrastructure components are connected to the port forming a Spanning Tree of their own No additional redundant connections to this network segment are permitted 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 23 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 24 A PHOENIX CONTACT 5 2 5 9 Modifying the Protocol Timer Modifying the protocol timer may result in unstable networks It may be necessary to modify the protocol timer if e g there are more than ten active Spanning Tree components in a single network You can also attempt to reduce the reconfiguration times by modifying the timer However care should be taken in order to prevent unstable networks Please note that the protocol times are specified by the root switch and that they are distributed to all devices via BPDU It is therefore only necessary to modify the values in the root switch If the root switch fails the timer values of another active STP switch i e the new root switch will be valid for the entire network segment Please remember this during component configuration Specifying the Timer Values STP and RSTP Maximum number of active Spanning Tree components along the path beginning at the root switch please refer to the following two example illustrations MaxAge 2 Hello Time 1 2x Forward Delay 1 s MaxAge MaxAge 22 x Hello Time 1 s The value
241. ring the interface module PHOENIX CONTACT 2 5 FL SWITCH MM HS Removal 1 Remove the mounting screw Removing the mounting screw on interface modules Figure 2 8 2 Pressthe positive latch A and pull out the module B Removing the interface module Figure 2 9 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 6 Assembly and Installation 2 4 Assembly and Removal of the FL M LABEL Labeling Field Accessories The FL M LABEL labeling field Order No 2891055 can be used to individually identify the ports of the MMS The labeling field can be attached to the top of the head station or to the extension modules FL M LABEL LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE PHCENIX E im uu 1 CH 1E a 1mm CH 28H 28H 22H E 28m FL Tin adios une Ki XO X3 x4 Ord No 28 32 32 6 Es A a as HH 1 Ya i Reset 10 Fa US1 O ere 00A0451BDD mM i BH Fail H 2 US1 GND US2 GND R1 R2 V 24 D O NC IE o O B 9 9 9 0 IlOI B9 O i a a
242. rm contact not activated 1 Indication via the alarm contact activated 2 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEnable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 2 Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the indication for the configured states via the alarm contact Monitoring disabled 1 Monitoring enabled 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 101 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID flWorkFWCtrlAlarmC ontactStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 3 Integer Read This object can be used to request the status of the alarm contact Alarm contact open 1 Alarm contact closed fI WorkFWCtrlAlarmContactReason 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 4 Display string Read Indicates the reason why the alarm contact was opened fI WorkFWCtrlSecurity 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 fI WorkFWCtrlSecurityAccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessTable fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessEntry OID OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 1 1 Integer32 Read Shows the index of the entry in the access table OID Syntax Access Description fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessAddr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 1 2 IP address Read and write Indicates the IP address of the devices that have access rights for this switch OID Syntax Access Description fiWorkFWCtrl
243. rnet Group Management Protocol IGMP PHOENIX CONTACT 6 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 6 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 4 1 1 Extended Multicast Filtering If IGMP snooping is active multicast data streams are also detected for which no membership reports of possible recipients are registered For these multicasts groups are created dynamically These multicasts are forwarded to the querier i e the querier port is entered in the group If the switch itself is the querier these multicasts are blocked 6 4 2 General Multicast Configuration Web Page This web page provides global settings for multicast support Here IGMP snooping can be activated and an aging time can be specified for IGMP snooping information General Multicast Configuration IGMP Snooping 9 Disable Enable SMP Snoop Aging 300 s 30s up to 3600s 9 Disable SMP Query CO Version 1 O Version 2 IGMP Query Interval 125 s 10s up to 3600s General Multicast Configuration web page Enter password Figure 6 4 IGMP Snooping In IGMP snooping the switch passively listens in on the IGMP messages that are sent over the network and dynamically creates the appropriate groups The groups are not saved and will be lost on every power down or when switching off the snooping function IGMP Query An MMS with activated query function actively sends queries at query intervals and evaluates the received reports The MMS only sends IGMP query reports if IGMP snooping is enabled and on
244. rrrnnrrenn 3 8 DHCP EE 3 8 Diagnostic status indicators ssssssse 1 7 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System 1 10 DIP SWING D PR 3 13 Disconnected load o nnonnnnnnennsennennnnnnnnnnnnneennnnne 3 24 Discovery and Configuration Protocol 4 15 Biel TUAE RETE HR PR 4 35 Dotted decimal notation n nnnennennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 3 3 Dotted notation c cc cccecceceeccceeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeseeeeaeees 4 19 PHOENIX CONTACT A 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Dust protection Caps EE 3 14 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 4 15 E Sale PON Me ETT E 5 26 EE ee ER 2 10 Engineering miro Mer 4 15 Environmental Category EMC2 2 10 EITOMCOCC GOT EN E e P IE 3 22 LEE E 2 11 EthierliKe MIB EE 4 40 Event Ke E n 4 37 EXCOIWOIKSIIGOL o oen ee e exe daria ees 4 39 Extension module annnennennnnnnnnneenrsnrnsnrnerrsrrnnrnenen 1 4 External management 2 12 F Factory Ilariagel E 4 1 Far End Fault Detection 3 16 3 18 3 28 Faulty Senn 4 120 SIN Een 4 120 Fiber CONDECION E 3 15 mei do E EN 3 17 3 29 Firmware download oenseenennnenenennnnrnsnnnennsnrrnnnne 4 17 Firmware update 4 7 Firmware versions ecann ener 1 5 RISE ZFX SC oiae n 3 16 3 28 SR OM SC etii d teen eN 3 16 le CN KR E 3 18 FEIF ZHOS WOO ree ah BE ui am eee 3 14 PISIP 2P OF TOP TOD
245. s trapManagerConnection 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 99 This trap is used to test the connection between the device and trap manager flWorkNet 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 flWorkNetifParameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 fIWorkNetlfParamPhyAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 1 MAC address Read Contains the MAC address of the switch fIWorkNetlfParamlPAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 2 IP address Read and write Contains the current IP address of the MMS Modifications only take effect once the flWorkNetlfParamSave object has been executed 35 The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written flWorkNetifParamSubnetmask 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 3 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 75 FL SWITCH MM HS Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 76 PHOENIX CONTACT IP address Read and write Contains the current subnet mask of the MMS Modifications only take effect once the flWorkNetlfParamSave object has been executed 35 The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written flWorkNetifParamGwlpAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 4 IP address Read and write Contains the IP address of the current default gateway router of the MMS Modifications only take effect once the flWorkNetlfParamSave object has
246. s Web Page eese 6 2 6 3 2 Creating Static Multicast Groups eeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 6 2 6 3 3 Procedure for Creating a Multicast Group sssseeeeeeeese 6 5 6 4 1 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP ssssse 6 7 6 4 2 General Multicast Configuration Web Page nssssnnnsesrneesrrreesnnn 6 8 7 Virtual Local Area Network VAN 1 1 7 1 BASICS wr fare E 1 1 7 2 Enabling the VLAN Web Pages in Web Based Management 1 1 7 2 1 Management VU AN ID 1 2 7 2 2 Changing the Management VLAN ID eeeeeeeeeneeen 1 2 7 3 General VLAN Confguraton 7 3 7 4 C rent NV cm 7 4 1 4 1 Statie EE 7 5 7 4 2 VLAN Port Configuration cccccseecceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesaas 7 6 7 4 3 VLAN Port Configuration Table sissien a 7 7 7 5 Creating Static VEANS EE 7 7 7 5 Dyriamic ConflgHratiOEl 25 5 e rera aea to EU pese UE i Mui cue 7 9 7 6 VEAN ENGR E KEE 7 9 8 Operating as a PROFINET Devce 8 1 8 1 Preparing the Switch for PROFINET Mode 8 1 8 2 Switch as a PROFINET IO Device cc ecccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeessaaeeeeesaneeees 8 2 8 2 1 Configuration in the Engineering Tool ccccseeeccessseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeees 8 2 8 2 2 Configuring the Switch as a PROFINET IO Device 8 4 8 2 3 PROFINET Flashing FUNCHON date foa eet eti petes 8 5 8 2
247. s not yet been completed OK Ring detection has been completed and quick switch over is possible in the event of an error Breaked The ring is broken on this branch in the direction of the root switch A Failed on Port A The ring was broken on this switch at port A 35 In the event of a link failure in the ring the trapRstpRingFailure trap is sent 5 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Rapid Spanning Tree 35 If Breaked or Failed status lasts for longer than 60 seconds it is no longer displayed after the next topology modification since these rings no longer exist When using RSTP fast ring detection please note the following For RSTP fast ring detection do not use devices that do not support this function Enable RSTP fast ring detection on all devices All data paths must be in full duplex mode 5 2 2 Connection Failure Example The following diagram illustrates an RSTP ring with six switches where switch 1 is the root The ring extends over port 1 and port 2 for each switch On switch 4 the loop is broken by a blocking port If a cable interrupt occurs at the point indicated by the star this produces the following entries on the RSTP Fast Ring Detection web page Switch 3 Failed on Port A Switch 4 Broken Switch 3 would also generate the flWorkLinkFailure trap as long as the sending of traps is not disabled 6 GE 9 CT ae CODO Er EEE GEES E pa INN DO0
248. sTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 flWorkComponentsEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 Description Generates a table with the available interface modules of this switch station fiWorkComponentsIndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Indicates the selected interface number fiWorkComponentsOID OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 2 Syntax OBJECT IDENTIFIER Access Read Description This OID indicates the corresponding entry in fiWorkComponentsEntry fiWorkComponentsURL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the IP address of the switch fiWorkComponentsDevSign OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 4 Integer 0 24 Read Contains the designation of the interface module 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 73 FL SWITCH MM HS OID OID OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description 4 74 PHOENIX CONTACT flWorkTraps 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 flWorkTrapsDelemeter 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 trapPasswdAccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 1 Sent to the defined trap receiver on each modification or attempted modification of the device password and contains information about the status of the last modification or attempted modification trapFWHealth 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11
249. ss Description 4 108 PHOENIX CONTACT flSwitchCtrIVLAN 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 4 Integer Read and write Indicates whether the web pages required for VLAN configuration are enabled VLAN web pages hidden 1 VLAN web pages shown 2 flSwitchCtriVLANTagMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 5 Integer Read and write In Transparent mode the switch ignores the VLAN ID and forwards packets according to their priority alone In Tagging mode the packets are forwarded according to the regulation Transparent Tagging NO flSwitchCtriVLANTagStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 6 Integer Read Displays the current VLAN mode of the switch Transparent 1 Tagging 2 flSwitchCtrlLIdp 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 7 Integer Read and write This object can be used to enable disable the LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP deactivated 1 LLDP activated 2 Send 3 Receive 4 6874 en 09 OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics flSwitchCtrlIRSTPLargeTreeSupport 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 8 Integer Read and write When in RSTP large tree mode the number of switches that can be connected to the root can be increased from 7 to 28 switches Up to 7 switches in the root Up to 28 switches in the root Nea flSwitchCtrlIHashMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 9
250. ss assignment boot a replace an empiy System Mame by the default System Mame ike EE ARTI MM AS The settings become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Enter password OO Figure 8 1 Operating Mode web page Switching to Default When the switch is reset to Default mode from PROFINET mode the following settings mode are made LLDP remains active with the values default upon delivery P address assignment is set to BootP The station name for the switch does not change If no station name has been specified the device type is entered It is recommended to save the new configuration after changing operating mode Please note that some configuration modifications only take effect after a restart 8 2 Switch as a PROFINET IO Device 8 2 1 Configuration in the Engineering Tool 8 2 1 1 Specifying the Bus Configuration The switch can be operated as a PROFINET IO device if it is integrated under a control system in the bus configuration in the engineering tool 8 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_09 Operating as a PROFINET Device S PC WORK zlej I Datei Bearbeiten Angcht projekt Code Online Extras 7 Du E amp Belo e i m mf RI ER rs P m m e m emm a m EH Ea s 4 koffer fi ILC 350 PH 132 168 0 2 H F Ressource R am RES ILC350PN E d PROFINET P Hersteller Phoenix Contact D Produdhezekhrung S SWITCH AMS m F d bkS keffer de 192
251. ssible states on page 7 5 Current VLANs VID Status Group Membership static Ports 1 8 uuuuuuwlululu 1 Management Vlan Ports 9 16 UUUUUUU JU Ports 1 8 SOS t M 12 static Ports 9 16 pr E Pole ae a fon Ports 1 8 INIRE NIA A4 static Ports 16 c caa los f Tageed U Untagged Non Member This table indicates out of which ports each VLANs data is to be sent using configuration data entered manually Le web page Static VLANs or entered automatically from GVRP Note This web page wil be refreshed in 23 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 7 2 Current VLANs web page When the maximum number of created VLANs static and or dynamic is reached the following text appears below the key for the member states The switch supports only 32 VLANs Further VLANs will be refused VLAN 1 is always created statically and all ports are added to it as untagged members 6874 en 09 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 7 4 1 Static VLANs Static VLANs can be created on this web page Up to 31 new VLANs can be created VLAN 2 to VLAN 32 If more are created a corresponding message will be displayed VLAN 1 is always created statically and all ports are added to it as untagged members By default upon delivery with Tagging VLAN mode activated network based management interfaces WBM Telnet and SNMP are only av
252. ssignment of the transmit and receive direction is correct 10000 m 32808 ft maximum 8 Multi mode glass fiber Figure 3 14 RX ex Tx RX E el TX H D I ay ay FL IF 2FX SC F FL IF 2FX SM SC F 36000 m 118100 ft maximum Single mode glass fiber Fiber optic connection between devices 68740021 FL IF 2FX SM SC F The maximum length of the fiber optic cables depends on the interface module fiber type used PHOENIX CONTACT 3 17 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 5 FL IF 2FX ST D Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the FL IF 2FX ST D interface is removed and another interface type is inserted in its place the ports are set to auto negotiation 3 2 5 1 Default Upon Delivery When the interface modules are inserted they are preset with
253. st broadcast address 3 31 N Navigation IrG6 uico ted cad o c ab ena Du n c RD 4 12 EIS E EE 2 10 Network availability eeeesseeesseesesss sss 1 2 Network dass A 3 3 Viel di B cc eed bed eens eee 3 3 Network part A 3 5 Network topology eese 5 2 INNO FEQUNGANCY EE 5 3 O Online diagnostics eseeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 36 Overload eo e A ae pee e Ld 3 24 P P pidge E 4 40 Packet processing seduence 3 32 Parameterization memory default upon delivery 3 22 RER EUN 2 12 PASS WOM EE 4 11 4 12 Password Concept 4 12 Beien le Le e NEE 4 34 6874 en 09 POE IMLS Tae Oc ideo foni tein Ee a epa add 3 24 PoE interface module aannnnannnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnn 4 34 POE Port Table aannannnannannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonrennreeneennee 4 33 POF connection between devices 3 12 POF interface enera 3 12 Point to point Conpechon 4 23 Polymer fiber optic paths aaanennnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnn 3 13 Polymer HCS fibers cccccccsssseeeseeseeecseeseesceeeeees 1 1 Port assidbtTie ibus erent eiemto iac sairi Deco evo s sat ext apod 1 12 POll CAPACI e m T en oie eee eel art een as 4 31 Port Configuration Table 4 25 Being We den e ee Er 4 31 Biel dei geit e P 3 32 PONE TONS CERERI 5 26 POPS OCUMIEY e TER 4 31 Port security status uk 4 24 Port switched Off uiii oe
254. t Up to date information on Phoenix Contact products can be found on the Internet at www phoenixcontact com Make sure you always use the latest documentation It can be downloaded at www download phoenixcontact com A conversion table is available on the Internet at www download phoenixcontact com general 7000 en O0 pdf 6874 en 09 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Modular Managed Switch System sseesssssssssssssssseeneee nnne nnne nnne nnne nne nnn nnns 1 1 1 1 EENEG RH E EUR 1 1 1 1 1 System GCombporierite 5 c rei e Bose bee deos Du ce eae 1 3 1 1 2 Firmware Versions and Their Functions eeeeeeeeeeeeess 1 5 1 1 3 Firmware Functions and the Required Hardware 1 6 1 1 4 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System tor Normal Operation EE 1 10 1 1 5 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for GL Certified Operation eeeeeseseeseseeereeeen 1 11 1 1 6 Assignment of Ports to Slots eeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeennee 1 12 1 2 Status and Diagnostic Indcators 1 12 1 2 1 LEDs on the Head Station and Extension Modules 1 12 1 2 2 Meaning of the 7 Segment Display eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese 1 14 Z WASSEIMMBIY AMG EE e EE 2 1 2 1 Assembly and Removal of the Head Gtaton 2 1 2 2 Assembly and Removal of Extension Modules nnsnesnnuennennennnenrennresenre
255. t identifier consists of the path costs and the priority Since the priority appears before the path costs the appropriate priority can be clearly assigned by the root switch independent of the path costs The port with the highest priority lowest value becomes the root port 5 2 5 5 Processes in the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Selecting the Root Switch On every topology modification each switch first assumes that it is the root switch and thus sends its own switch ID e g the MAC address into the network All switches receive these messages MAC multicast and store the contents of the best message The best message consists of the following topology information the root ID information and the cost information Having received the root ID information the switch compares the following The new root ID is saved if it has a higher priority than the IDs that are already saved including its own ID The path costs are checked if the root ID is the same as the one already saved If they are lower the ID is saved Ifthe root ID and the costs are the same the ID of the sender is checked If the ID is lower than the switch s own ID it is saved Ifthe root ID costs and sender ID are the same the priority of the sender port is the decisive criterion Selecting a Designated Switch For every network the switch with the most favorable root connection is selected this switch is called the designated switch The r
256. t1dStpPortPathCost 9 dot1dStpHelloTime 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 dot1dStpPortDesignatedRoot 7 dot1dStpPortDesignatedCost 8 dot1dStpPortDesignatedBridge 9 dot1dStpPortDesignatedPort 10 dot1dStpPortForwardTransitions 11 dot1dStpPortPathCost32 6 dot1dStpVersion 7 dot1dStpTxHoldCount 8 dot1dStpPathCostDefault 9 dot1dStpExtPortTable 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 1 dot1dStpExtPortEntry 1 dot1dStpPortProtocolMigration 2 dot1dStpPortAdminEdgePort 3 dot1dStpPortOperEdgePort 4 dot1dStpPortAdminPointToPoint 5 dot1dStpPortOperPointToPoint 6 dot1dStpPortAdminPathCost 4 3 5 3 dotidTp 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 The dotidTp group contains bridge specific information 1 dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards 2 dot1dTpAgingTime 3 dotidTpFdbTable 1 dot1dTpFdbEntry 1 dot1dTpFdbAddress 2 dotidTpFdbPort 3 dot1dTpFdbStatus 4 dotidTpPortTable dot1dTpPortEntry 1 dot1dTpPort 2 dot1dTpPortMaxlInfo 3 dot1dTpPortInFrames 4 dotidTpPortOutFrames 5 dot1dTpPortlnDiscards 5 dotidTpHCPortTable dot1dTpHCPortEntry 1 dot1dTpHCPortinFrames 2 dot1dTpHCPortOutFrames 3 dot1dTpHCPortInDiscards 6 dotidTpPortOverflowTable dot1dTpPortOverflowEntry 1 dot1dTpPortlnOverflowFrames 2 dot1dTpPortOutOverflowFrames 3 dot1dTpPortlnOverflow
257. tax MAC address Access Read Description Displays the last MAC address that sent frames to this port fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 103 FL SWITCH MM HS Description Displays the security mode of the port or modifies it No security mode activated For unauthorized access only trap transmission 2 In the event of unauthorized access the port is blocked 3 In the event of unauthorized access the port is blocked with automatic enabling later on 4 fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Displays the security state of the port or modifies it Port reenabled OK 1 Port is currently blocked 2 Port is currently blocked will be enabled automatically later on 3 35 If the port continues to receive packets from illegal MAC addresses the port will immediately switch to one of the blocked modes fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortlllegalAddrCounter OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 5 Syntax Gauge32 Access Read Description Specifies the number of unauthorized MAC addresses that have been registered at this port fI WorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacTable fiWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMaclndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 1 Synt
258. tch over times with RSTP fast ring detection Configuration of switches using web based management SNMP Telnet or locally via a V 24 RS 232 interface Multicast filtering static and dynamic IGMP snooping optional querier function VLAN support according to 802 1Q 32 VLANs Port security functions Access control for web based management WBM ntegration in PROFINET environments Topology detection using LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Address assignment via BootP DHCP DCP or statically Address assignment using DHCP option 82 relay agent Support of Power over Ethernet PoE 1 1 1 System Components The head station is the central element of the Modular Managed Switch System It contains all the management functions and the interface modules provide it with the desired interfaces to the network Up to two extension modules can be connected to a head station which means that the maximum system configuration comprises 24 Ethernet ports Thanks to certification according to Germanischer Lloyd GL Certificate No 2427504 HH the FL SWITCH MM HS M head station the FL MXT M extension module and some of the available interface modules have been approved for shipbuilding and off onshore applications Please observe the list of GL certified components on page 11 8 Please also observe the notes for supply voltage connection on page 2 10 Always switch off the supply voltag
259. tchlgmpSnoopExtended flSwitchBlockUnknownMulticastAtQuerier 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 5 1 Integer Read and write If this function is activated the switch only forwards multicast packets if it received membership reports in advance Activated 2 Deactivated 1 flSwitchForwardUnknownMulticastToQuerier 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 5 2 Integer Read and write PHOENIX CONTACT 4 111 FL SWITCH MM HS OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description 4 112 PHOENIX CONTACT flSwitchlgmpQuery 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 flSwitchlgmpQueryTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 1 flSwitchlgmpQueryEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 1 1 flSwitchlgmpQueryPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 1 1 1 Port list Read This object displays the ports that received the IGMP router query BPDUs flSwitchlgmpQueryEnable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 2 Integer Read and write This object can be used to specify the protocol version that the switch uses to transmit IGMP queries Deactivated 1 Version 1 2 Version 2 3 flSwitchlgmpQuerylnterval 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 3 Integer Read and write This object can be used to specify the time interval during which the switch transmits IGMP queries Default 125s Permissible value range 10s to 3600 s in increments of 1 s flSwitchlgmpTableErase 1 3 6 1 4 1 4
260. ter The IP address of the gateway router must be in the same subnetwork as the address of the switch 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 1 2 2 Assigning IP Addresses The IP address is a 32 bit address which consists of a network part and a user part The network part consists of the network class and the network address There are currently five defined network classes Classes A B and C are used in modern applications while Classes D and E are hardly ever used It is therefore usually sufficient if a network device only recognizes Classes A B and C Bit 1 HS SS SHH Bit 32 TELE TET ETT EL EL ET 6146A056 Figure 3 1 Position of bits within the IP address With binary representation of the IP address the network class is represented by the first bits The key factor is the number of ones before the first zero The assignment of classes is shown in the following table The empty cells in the table are not relevant to the network class and are already used for the network address Bta Bitz Bita Bia csa o case 1 9 osse 1 3 9 oso i 5 fo The bits for the network class are followed by those for the network address and the user address Depending on the network class a different number of bits are available both for the network address network ID and the user address host ID 14 bits 16 bits 28 bit multicast identifier 2 bits reserved IP addresses ca
261. tet string Read Here the configuration name of the configuration saved in the memory module can be requested fI WorkFWCtrlConfigMemFwVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 2 Octet string Read Here the firmware version with which the configuration had been saved can be read flWorkFWCtriConfigMemlpAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 3 Octet string Read Here the IP address of the device that saved this configuration can be read fIWorkFWCtrlSerial 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 fI WorkFWCtrlSerialBaud 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 1 Integer Read This object can be used to request the set data transmission rate of the serial interface 2400 baud 1 9600 baud 2 19200 baud 3 38400 baud 4 fI WorkFWCtrlSerialDataBits 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 2 Integer Read Contains the number of data bits in the serial interface 8 bit 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 99 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description 4 100 PHOENIX CONTACT flWorkFWCtrlSerialStopBits 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 3 Integer Read Contains the number of stop bits in the serial interface 1 bit 1 2 bits 2 flWorkFWCtrlSerialParity 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 4 Integer Read Contains the parity mode for the serial interface None 1 Odd 2 Even 3 fIWorkFWCtrlSerialFlowControl 1 3 6 1 4 1 434
262. that you know the password for the configuration on the memory module 3 2 8 4 Functions of the Twisted Pair Interface Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically 35 Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path 33 to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 2 8 5 Network Connection See FL IF 2TX VS RJ on page 3 9 and onwards 6874
263. the non volatile memory of the switch The current configuration was saved Save current The active configuration together with the corresponding configuration name can be saved configuration here by entering a valid password Save current configuration Configuration Name MMS confiquration Enter password cave Figure 4 24 Save current configuration web page 35 If the new configuration is not activated by a reset after a configuration download the Save current configuration command overwrites the previously loaded configuration and instead saves the active configuration of the MMS Set default upon delivery This option can be used to reset the switch to its default settings default upon delivery by entering a valid password Set default upon delivery After setting the delven status the device accomplishes a reboot automatically Enter password Execute Figure 4 25 Set default upon delivery web page WBM can only be called using a valid IP address Once the switch has been reset to its 33 default settings it has no valid IP address and the addressing mechanism is set to BootP 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 21 FL SWITCH MM HS Load the last stored This option can be used to reactivate the last configuration saved in the memory module configuration or on the device All modifications made to the configuration since it was last saved are lost Load the last stored configuration
264. time PHOENIX CONTACT 4 11 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 12 FL SWITCH MM HS ES D ER General Instructions Information Sitemap l Device Information I General Configuration Switch Station 4 Home PHOENIX CONTACT 4 2 2 2 Password Concept After having entered the valid password no further entry of the password is necessary for a period of 300 s default After this period of time has elapsed or after clicking on Logout the password must be re entered The period of time can be set using the fIWorkFWCtrlLoginExpire SNMP object within a range of 30 s to 3600 s default 300 s The concept is valid for the first ten users logged on at the same time All other users must confirm each configuration modification by entering the password until less than ten users are logged on 4 2 3 Functions Information in WBM The navigation tree provides direct access to the following four areas General Instructions Basic information about WBM Device Information General device information General Configuration Device configuration device as a network device Switch Station Device specific configuration and diagnostics 4 2 3 1 General Instructions FL SWITCH MM HS last update 12 11 19 Information Navigate through the Web Based Management by selecting a link in this area nr the menu to the lett General Instructions This page and an overview about the structure of this webside
265. tion is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half or full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface A Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically 35 Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off The PoE configuration options are also available if no PoE interface module is inserted If a PoE interface module is inserted the configuration is transmitted to the module after a few seconds 3 2 9 3 Network Connection See FL IF 2TX VS R
266. tly 3 28 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 Startup and Functions 3 2 10 3 Connecting the SCRJ Connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until 33 just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors 68740020 Figure 3 18 Connecting the SCRJ connectors 3 2 10 4 Fiber Optic Connection Between Devices When connecting two fiber optic interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber 35 optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver The SCRJ connectors which are connected using a support are keyed to ensure that the assignment of the transmit and receive direction is correct RX RX Rx TX TX Max 100 m TX HCS fiber RX RX RX TX TX TX H LA ges Max 50 m e Polymer fiber AS QU As 687409061 FL IF 2POF SCRJ D FL IF 2POF SCRJ D FL IF 2POF SCRJ D Figure 3 19 Fiber optic connection between devices 33 The maximum length of the fiber optic cables depends on the interface module fiber type used 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 29 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 10
267. to a plugged in memory module 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 2 4 4d PHOENIX CONTACT 3 1 2 Assigning IP Parameters When the supply voltage is switched on or the reset button is pressed the switch sends requests BootP requests to assign IP parameters The button must be held down for a few seconds to trigger a reset The BootP function can be deactivated via the management By default upon delivery the BootP function is activated The assignment of valid IP parameters is vital to the management function of the switch If the switch has not received any valid IP parameters 01 or dc appears in the display and one of the mode LEDs ACT 100 or FD flashes Options for Assigning IP Parameters Configuration via the BootP protocol default upon delivery Static configuration via the management interfaces DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DCP Discovery and Configuration Protocol 4 1 2 on page 4 1 describes the assignment of IP parameters with Factory Manager 2 1 3 1 2 1 Valid IP Parameters IP parameters comprise the following three elements IP address subnet mask and default gateway router Valid IP addresses are 000 000 000 001 to 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 to 223 255 255 255 Valid multicast addresses are 224 000 000 001 to 239 255 255 255 Valid subnet masks are 255 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 252 Default gateway rou
268. tructure components are located between switch 1 and switch 2 there are two options to ensure communication between the termination devices 6874 en 09 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 1 The infrastructure is also operated in VLAN Tagging mode and VLAN 5 is created based on the relevant devices Result high configuration and maintenance costs 2 GVRP is activated in VLAN Tagging mode on all infrastructure components and the information about the created VLANs is transmitted within the network via switch 1 and switch 2 Result bidirectional data exchange is ensured between termination device A and B 7 5 1 Dynamic Configuration Dynamic VLAN configuration using GVRP can be set for transmission between infrastructure components Here every switch with static or dynamically created VLANs transmits information within the network via VLAN IDs The adjacent switches with activated GVRP then create the same VLANs and add the receiver ports of the GVRP BPDUs as tagged ports A BPDU receiver then distributes its own BPDUs to all ports via the dynamically learned VLAN Switch Configuration 1 All switches must be set to VLAN Tagging mode After saving the configuration a restart is required 2 GVRP must be activated on all switches Since termination devices usually do not support VLAN tags port specific settings must be made at the termination device ports for the infrastructure The switch then adds the corresponding tags to every
269. ts 13 etherHistoryJabbers 14 etherHistoryCollisions 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 etherHistoryUtilization 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 4 3 alarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 3 The alarm group requests statistical values and compares them with the defined limit values If a value is above or below the limit value an alarm and a trap are generated 1 alarmTable 1 alarmEntry 1 alarmlIndex 2 alarmInterval 3 alarmVariable 4 alarmSampleType 5 alarmValue 6 alarmStartupAlarm 7 alarmRisingThreshold 9 alarmRisingEventlndex alarmFallingEventlndex alarmOwner 8 alarmFalling Threshold 0 1 2 alarmStatus 1 1 1 4 3 4 4 hosts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 4 1 hostControlTable 1 hostControlEntry 1 hostControllndex 2 hostControlDataSource 3 hostControlTableSize 4 hostControlLastDeleteTime 5 hostControlOwner 6 hostControlStatus 2 hostTable 1 hostEntry 1 hostAddress 2 hostCreationOrder 3 hostIndex 4 hostInPkts 5 hostOutPkts 6 hostInOctets 7 hostOutOctets 8 hostOutErrors 4 54 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 4 3 4 5 4 3 4 6 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics 9 hostOutBroadcastPkts 10 hostOutMulticastPkts 3 hostTimeTable 1 hostTimeEntry 1 hostTimeAddress 2 hostTimeCreationOrder 3 hostTimelndex 4 hostTimeln
270. umentation in particular data sheets installation instructions manuals etc The aforementioned limitations of liability and exemptions from liability do not apply in so far as liability must be assumed e g according to product liability law in cases of premed itation gross negligence on account of loss of life physical injury or damage to health or on account of the violation of important contractual obligations Claims for damages for the violation of important contractual obligations are however limited to contract typical pre dictable damages provided there is no premeditation or gross negligence or that liability is assumed on account of loss of life physical injury or damage to health This ruling does not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detriment of the user PHOENIX CONTACT FL SWITCH MM HS PHOENIX CONTACT Statement of Legal Authority This manual including all illustrations contained herein is copyright protected Use of this manual by any third party is forbidden Reproduction translation and public disclosure as well as electronic and photographic archiving or alteration requires the express written con sent of Phoenix Contact Violators are liable for damages Phoenix Contact reserves all rights in the case of patent award or listing of a registered design Third party products are always named without reference to patent rights The ex istence of such rights shall not be excluded Interne
271. unction A local communication connection can be established to an external management station via the V 24 RS 232 interface in Mini DIN format Use the PRG CAB MINI DIN programming cable Order No 2730611 The communication connection is established using a corresponding emulation between the switch and a PC e g HyperTerminal under Windows and enables access to the user interface The reference potentials of the V 24 RS 232 interface and the supply voltage are not electrically isolated 4 4 1 1 Interface Configuration Make the following settings on your Windows PC COM1 Properties Ed Port Settings Bits per second 38400 sl Data bits fe D Parity None Stop bits D Flow contrat None Restore Defaults Figure 4 50 Configuring the HyperTerminal 4 4 1 2 Calling the User Interface Connect the PC and the switch using a suitable cable PRG CAB MINI DIN Order No 2730611 Once you have established the connection select the Ctrl L key combination on the PC The switch then requests the screen contents 6874_en_09 Es Es Configuration and Diagnostics 4 4 2 User Interface Functions 4 4 2 1 Functions During the Boot Process After a Restart If you open the user interface in the first five seconds immediately after an MMS restart you have the option of triggering a firmware update Since the actual switch firmware is not yet started at this stage even in the event of an error e g if
272. update a reset is executed automatically to activate the new firmware Please make sure that the TFTP Server service program is activated in the Factory Manager toolbar You can monitor the download in the Factory Manager message window 25 50 75 100 Always wait until all the LEDs light up after approximately two minutes and the device is available again after booting It is not ensured that all existing configuration data will be retained after a firmware update downgrade Therefore please check the configuration settings or return the device to the settings default upon delivery A voltage failure during a firmware update results in the destruction of the firmware on the MMS An update via XMODEM is required see Starting With Faulty Software Firmware on page 4 120 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 17 FL SWITCH MM HS Change Password Menu This option can be used to specify the current password and then enter a new unique password By default upon delivery the password is private please note that it is case sensitive For security reasons the input fields do not display your password but instead is displayed Change Password Enter old password FO Enter new password FO Retype new password NENNEN The password must be between 4 and 12 characters long Attention The password will be sent over the network In unencrypted format Apply Figure 4 19 Change Password web page The passwo
273. upply No PoE termination device connected No PoE interface module detected at this port No hardware support due to the system bus Detected class of a connected termination device Class 0 to Class 4 Output voltage and output current 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics Port power over Ethernet Configuration Port Number v Module HS Interface AT Port Name Port 2 PoE Fault State No fault detected Port Power Status C Disable 9 Enable Port PoE fault monitoring 9 Disable Enable Current limitation for Class 1 jn m OFF ON Limits output current for class 1 devices to max Olm Device Class Class 3 Output voltage 47745 mw Output Current 419 mA Output Power o 907 mW Enter password Port Configuration of part General Security PoE R STP VLAN Port Statistics of port 2 General Figure 4 41 Port Power over Ethernet Configuration web page Diagnostics Display Menu Current display of the 7 segment display and the states of the alarm contact and redundant power supply Display segment Display Operating status Firmware is working Online Diagnostics Alarm Contact Stas At present no event ta trigger the alarm contact Is recognized Power Supply status Power supplies US1 and LIS2 are connected Note This web page will be refreshed in 14 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Senices Figure 4 4
274. upport large tree support Enable the large tree support option on all devices f RSTP is to be activated as the redundancy mechanism in an existing network with more than seven switches along the relevant path then the large tree support option must first be enabled on all devices tis recommended that large tree support is not activated in networks with less than seven switches along the relevant path 6874 en 09 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 17 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 2 5 2 Example Topologies 5 2 5 3 Redundant Coupling of Network Segments In this example two network segments are connected via redundant data paths Two RSTP components have ports in the Blocking Discarding state highlighted in gray This is sufficient to operate the network E aoe cose woe KAJ 1 se ATT OTTO 9 nnn 2 HTTTTTITRSAETTTITIT VWKWODE INKWODE UNKWODE iNKWODE NES oo ES FL SWITCH MM HS kan ZS x ZS x 7 FE EI 3l 3 00A04518DD ed 8 eweg iNKWODE INKWODE LNK NODE LOU ION OU or kul 1 i
275. uration web page Type An icon is displayed here which corresponds to the neighboring device type Ethernet Device is displayed in general for devices produced by other manufacturers Address Indicates the management IP address for the neighbor Device Indicates the system name of the neighbor Indicates the port number of the neighboring switch that is used to connect the neighbor to the local switch If the neighbor is identified as a Phoenix Contact switch the port number is implemented as a link to the Port Configuration web page for the neighbor PHOENIX CONTACT 9 3 FL SWITCH MM HS 9 2 Representation of the Topology in an Engineering Tool The LLDP information can be represented as such or similarly in engineering tools EthernetTopology X EthernetTopology Ei Projektname topologie screenshot Verbindungsmodus aus MC MCS Middle 13 port 08 pon 001 T MCS Bottom Figure 9 3 Representation of the topology 9 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_09 DHCP Relay Agent 10 DHCP Relay Agent 6874 en 09 Es The MMS is able to act as a DHCP relay agent The DHCP relay agent function is required for DHCP option 82 DHCP option 82 is used by the DHCP server when assigning addresses to identify the requesting termination device via the corresponding physical switch port In the event of device replacement DHCP option 82 enables the replacement device to be assigned the same IP address as the replaced dev
276. ve to configure the port security for each port at the web page Ports Port Security Enter password fs Apply legal Address Counter Here you can set the Megal Address Counter of al ports to zero You find the counters at the web page Ports Port Security You find the settings for the user interfaces at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 4 31 Services web page 6874 en 09 Configuration and Diagnostics DHCP Relay Agent Menu In this menu the DHCP relay agent can be activated deactivated according to the port the corresponding address of the DHCP server can be entered and the type of remote ID can be configured For additional information on the function of the DHCP relay agent please refer to DHCP Relay Agent on page 10 1 Ports Port Table Menu Overview of all available ports Clicking on the relevant port number opens a port specific page Port Configuration Port Table Module x Port Type Port Status Link State ox 1 Tx 10 100 enable 100 MBit FD ox 2 Ts 10 100 enable 100 MBit FD af Tx 10 100 3 MEM enable not connected u IE TX 10 100 ERN el MEM enable nat connected empty enable nat natconnected H empty enable nat connected empty enable nat connected empty enable nat connected Note This web page will E refreshed in 20 sec automatically change the interval at the web nage Services Figure 4 32
277. x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the front Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in SC format for connection on the front Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in SC format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in B FOC ST format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber single mode 100 Mbps in SC format for connection on the front Interface module with 1 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format and 1 x polymer fiber 10 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 1 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format and 1 x HCS fiber 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the bottom and parameterization memory Interface module with 2 x polymer fiber 10 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x HCS fiber 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format and Power over Ethernet for connection on the front Interface module with 2 x polymer fiber 10 100 Mbps in SC RJ format for connection on the bottom and optical diagnostics 11 6 PHOENIX CONTACT Order Design
278. yclic transmission of Update information Interval BPDUS to all ports Aging Time To Live Delete neighbor information DE Receiving a BPDU froma Extend list of neighbors and Include sender in the list of new neighbor respond with port specific neighbors BPDU Link Layer Discovery Protocol z z d Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Status Disable 9 Enable Message Transmit Interval 3t s 5s up to 327685 Message Time To Live 120s Figure 9 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol web page The Message Time To Live is determined by multiplying the Message Transmit 33 Interval with the Message Transmit Hold Multiplier The Message Transmit Hold Multiplier can only be modified via SNMP The default value is four 9 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 09 LLDP Topology 6874 en 09 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Topology Local Neighbors Port Type Address Device Port 1 eal 192 168 0 45 FL SWITCH MM HS f 12 ks 192 168 0 3 fl il bk2 quicks part LIDH 192 168 0 5 t pn ibs4 quick nort 001 Note This web page wil be refreshed in 2D sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 9 2 LLDP Topology web page A table is created for known neighbors and contains the following five columns Local Port Contains the port number of the local switch that is used to connect a neighbor to this switch The port number is also a link to the local Port Config

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Descargar  User`s Manual  Sur l`ensemble du règlement les superficies exprimées  TK 1000 automatic Betriebsanleitung  USER MANUAL DISTELL FISH FRESHNESS  XCSoar 6.4  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file